feee 


wages 


aiefeteernepepeibrryen 


| 


| 


- THE UNIVERSITY 


OF ILLINOIS | 


LIBRARY 
| 
Beanie 
TLSP 


Date Dv The person charging this material is re- 
sponsible for its return on or before the 
1% O26 | Latest Date stamped below. 


Theft, mutilation, and underlining of books 
™ = are reasons for disciplinary action and may 
“—- tJ result in dismissal from the University. 


University of Illinois Library 


MAY -'7 1969 
FER 1 411997 


FEB 03 1992 
MAY 14 2009 


L161— O-1096 


_ THE UNIVERSITY _ 


OF ILLINOIS 
LIBRARY: 


3 Sisco 


THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


A HANDBOOK FOR 
FEDERAL TRAINING CAMPS 


Digitized by the Internet Archive 
In 2022 with funding from 
University of Illinois Urbana-Champaign 


https://archive.org/details/plattsburgmanualOOelli_ 0 


THE 
PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


A HANDBOOK FOR 
FEDERAL TRAINING CAMPS 


BY 
O. O. ELLIS 


FIRST LIEUTENANT, UNITED STATES INFANTRY 
AND 
= Py 
EK. B. GAREY 
FIRST LIEUTENANT, UNITED STATES INFANTRY 


(INSTRUCTORS, PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP, 1916) 


WITH MORE THAN 
150 ILLUSTRATIONS 


NEW YORK 
THE CENTURY CO. 
1917 


Copyright, 1917, by 


Tue Century Co. 


Published, March, 1917 


Yo 


- 


o 


\Y) 


8 A 


TO 
THOSE FAR-SEEING MEN 


WHO INAUGURATED AND ATTENDED THE 
FIRST FEDERAL TRAINING CAMP 
THIS TEXT IS RESPECTFULLY 
DEDICATED 


364503 


PREFACE 


This book is to tell the man who is going to Platts- 
burg, or to any Federal Training Camp, what he 
should know. Its further purpose is to offer a means 
of review to the man who has attended any Training 
Camp and to start him, if he so desires, along the cor- 
rect road for a commission in the officers’ Reserve 
Corps. 

The authors have commanded companies at Platts- 
burg, New York, and noting the need of such a text 
compiled their observations while there. 

The average man attending a Federal ‘Training 
Camp wants to know as much as possible about the 
Art and Science of war. He wants to acquire a good 
knowledge of the principles involved. He is _ inter- 
ested in the technique of movements. He is willing 
to work for these things but he often becomes lost in 
confusion when he attempts to study the technical serv- 
ice manuals. He does not know how to select the most 
important and omit the less important. The authors 
have selected from the standard texts some of the vitally 
important subjects and principles and have presented 
them to the civilian in a simple and plain way. 

The first part of the text is for the beginner. It tells 
him what steps to take to attend a Federal Camp, how 


vl 


vill PREFACE 


to prepare physically for the strenuous work. After 
assisting him through the first month, in which it ad- 
vises him what to do and what not to do, how to direct 
his energies for the greatest efficiency in the short time 
at his disposal, it presents for his consideration and 
study the Officers’ Reserve Corps. 

The second part, or supplement, is a more technical 
discussion of those subjects introduced in the first. It 
is intended principally for those who have made excel- 
lent progress, and for the Officers’ Reserve Corps man. 

The authors intend to revise this work as new condi- 
tions arise. ‘They would like to have the advice and 
assistance of any one who has attended, or who wishes 
to encourage, Federal Training Camps. 


CHAPTER 


CONTENTS 


GENERAL ADVICE 

PuysicaL EXERCISE . 

ScHOOL OF THE SOLDIER . 

SCHOOL OF THE SQUAD 

ScHOOL OF THE COMPANY 

Fire SUPERIORITY 

THE SERVICE OF SECURITY . 

ATTACK AND DEFENSE 

GENERAL Principies oF Tarcetr PRractTicE 
Practice Marcu or “Hiker” 


OrFricers’ RESERVE Corps 


SUPPLEMENT 


Tue THeory or SECURITY . 
ATTACK AND DEFENSE 
PATROLLING 

TarcGetT PRACTICE 

Tent PITcHING . 


BIGNATS ANDLGCODES#e. ) se) 6) o> Tete 


. 130 
. 136 
. 144 
me ELDO 
. 159 
- 169 


. 213 
. 234 
. 246 
. 252 
ea 
. 284 


FOREWORD 


The Plattsburg Manual, written by Lieutenants 
Ellis and Garey, will prove very useful to men who are 
contemplating attendance at Plattsburg or other United 
States military training camps. It will also be of great 
value to those who are undergoing training thereat. 

It is full of practical information presented in a simple 
and direct manner and gives in detail much data not 

easily found elsewhere. It is a useful book, easily 
understandable by those who have had little or no mili- 
tary experience. 

It will be useful not only at training camps but it 
will be of very great value at schools and colleges where 
military instruction is being given. 

The authors of this book have performed a valuable 
service, one which will tend to facilitate and aid very 
much the development of military training in this coun- 
try. In addition to the purely mechanical details of 
training the book presents in a very effective and simple 
manner the tactical use of troops under various condi- 
tions. 

In a word it is a useful and sound work and one which 
can be commended to those who contemplate a course in 
military training. 

(Signed) Lronarp Woop, 
Major General U. S. A. 
February 27, 1917. 


a , 
eS ee on 


_ 


THE 
PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


THE 
PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


CHAPTER I 


GENERAL ADVICE 
HOW TO ATTEND A FEDERAL TRAINING CAMP 


The United States is divided geographically into Mil- 
itary Departments with a general officer commanding 
each department. There will be, most probably, one or 
more Federal Training Camps, each year in each de- 
partment within the United States. ‘To attend one of 
these camps it is necessary to secure the permission of 
the Commanding General of the Department in which 
the camp is located. ‘To do this write to the Command- 
ing General at his Department Headquarters and make 
your wishes known. Ask for an application blank and 
any necessary data for you to have on the subject. 

The Departments and their Headquarters are as fol- 
lows: 

(1) The Eastern Department, with Headquarters 
at Governors Island. 

(2) The Central Department, with Headquarters 
at Chicago, Ill. 

(3) The Southern Department, with Headquar- 


ters at Fort Sam Houston, Texas. 
3 


4 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


(4) The Western Department, with Headquar- 
ters at San Francisco, California. 

(5) The Philippine Department, with Headquar- 
ters at Manila. 

(6) The Hawaiian Department, with Headquar- 
ters at Honolulu, Hawaii. 

The Government will pay your railroad transporta- 
tion by the most usual and direct route to and from the 
nearest camp, supply you with uniforms, including a 
hat and one pair of shoes, necessary arms, equipment, 
medical attention, and subsistence. All such informa- 
tion to govern your particular case will be sent you upon 
application to your Department Commander. 

There are certain qualifications as to age, citizenship, 
physical condition, etc., that the Government demands 
of each man attending one of these camps. ‘This, also, 
will be sent to you by your Department Commander. 

For the purpose of answering inquiries, the Military 
Training Camp Association of the United States has 
established the following departmental offices: 

Eastern. 31 Nassau Street, New York City. 

Central. Military Trainmg Camps Association, 
502 Federal Building, Chicago, Ll. 

Western. M. T. C. A. First National Bank 
Building, San Francisco, Cal. 

Southern. M. T. C. A., Ft. Sam Houston, San 
Antonio, Texas. 

This association is not in any way connected with the 
Government. It is for the purpose of promoting Train- 


GENERAL ADVICE 5 


ing Camps. Any of its branch offices will answer all 
questions about your transportation, uniforms, food, 
military equipment, and all practical questions that are 
not clear in your mind. 


GENERAL INFORMATION 


The designation of the civilians attending Military 
Training Camps will be “Federal Reserve Students.” 

The first camp for all reserve students will be an 
infantry camp. It is called the RED camp. In this 
camp instruction will be given in the duties of a private. 
After the first camp, the students will, as far as prac- 
ticable, be trained for the arm or corps of the service 
for which they express preference and for which they 
may seem suited. 

The second camp is called the WHITE. camp. In 
this camp instruction will be given in the duties of a 
corporal and sergeant. 

The third camp is called the BLUE camp. In this 
camp instruction will be given in the duties of Reserve 
Company Officers. In all practical instructions in the 
second and third camps the functions of command will, 
as far as practicable, be exercised by roster. 

Credit under certain regulations will be given for 
camp attendance in 1915 and 1916. 


DEPOSITS 
If you have not been able to purchase your uniform, 
you will be required, upon reporting to make a deposit 


6 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


of ten dollars to secure the United States against loss 
or damage other than the result of reasonable wear to 
the uniform the Government will issue to you. ‘The 
proper refund will be made at the end of the camp when 
the uniform is returned to the Government. Each re- 
serve student who provides his own uniform will not be 
required to make this deposit, but will be reimbursed by 
the United States the cost price of the same to the United 
States, plus 10 per cent. ‘This re1mbursement is made 
in three payments, each being of one third the entire 
amount. ‘The last payment is made at the end of the 
blue camp. 

Upon reporting, each reserve student must make a 
deposit of ten dollars to cover loss of, or damage to, 
equipment (gun, etc.) ; proper refund will be made at 
the end of the camp. This is in addition to the deposit 
required in the preceding paragraph. 


MAIL 


For the first week after camp commences, the camp 
post-office is swamped with incoming mail. The de- 
livery of your mail will be delayed unless your letters 
are sent to the company and the regiment to which you 
belong. Therefore, prepare, before you reach camp, 
several stamped postal cards, addressed to your family 
and business associates, containing directions to address 
all communications to you care of Company ——, Train- 
ing Regiment As soon as you are assigned to a 
company and regiment, fill in these data and mail these 


GENERAL ADVICE 7 


postal cards at once. ‘This should be done by wire in 
case important mail is expected during the first week 
of camp. Mail is delivered to each company as soon 
as a complete roll of the regiment can be made out and 
sent to the post-office; this usually required about five 
or six days at Plattsburg in 1916. During these five © 
or six days only the mail addressed in care of a company 
and regiment was delivered at the company streets. 


TYPHOID INOCULATION 


The Government administers the typhoid prophylaxis 
inoculation free of charge to any man desiring it. ‘The 
first inoculation (there being three in all) is given dur- 
ing the first few days of each camp. It 1s recommended 
that this inoculation be taken either at the camp or be- 
fore arrival. In the past typhoid fever has often been 
a far more dangerous foe than the opposing army. Dur- 
ing our war with Spain to every one American soldier 
killed by a hostile bullet, fourteen were killed by this 
disease. Indeed, it is more dangerous than the average 
citizen realizes, because a typhoid patient can be a car- 
rier of the germs for many years after his recovery and 
thus unconsciously be a menace to his community. 
Since the typhoid prophylaxis inoculation is a specific, 
it is a generous precaution on the part of every patriotic 
citizen to become inoculated. ‘The reactions are never 
serious and are frequently mild. ‘The inoculations are 
usually administered on Saturday, thus avoiding a seri- 
ous interference with the military service. 


8 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


WHAT TO DO ON YOUR ARRIVAL 

The official communication containing directions to 
report for training is lost by a great number of men. 
Have yours in your pocket book with your deposit 
money, and, upon arrival at camp, go immediately to 
Headquarters where, after presenting it, you will be as- 
signed to a regiment and company. ‘Then proceed as 
follows: 

1. Report at once with your hand baggage to your 
company commander, whom you can easily find when 
you reach the company street. 

2. Upon being assigned to a tent, proceed to it and 
place your hand baggage on an unoccupied cot or on 
the ground if cots have not been provided. 

3. Draw your property, checking it at the time to see 
that you have been issued the correct amount. 

4. 'Take this property to your cot or tent and recheck 
it if you are not satisfied with the first check or if it was 
not checked when issued to you. If you find a short- 
age, report it to one of the regular noncoramissioned 
officers on duty with the company, and ask him to check 
it with you. Then in case he is unable to find the miss- 
ing articles, report the matter to your company com- 
mander. 

You will probably be issued the following articles, 
known as “Quartermaster Property”: 

1 barrack bag (used as laundry bag) 

2 or 3 blankets 

2 pillow cases. 


GENERAL ADVICE 9 


cot 
mattress cover 
mattress 
pillow 
shelter half (half of a shelter tent) 
small metal tent pins 
poncho 
sweater 

Eight men are assigned to a tent. 1 basin, 1 bucket, 
and 1 lantern are issued to each tent. 

Clothing. 'The Government will furnish the follow- 
ing: 

1 hat, service 

1 hat, cord 

1 coat, service cotton, O. D. 

2 shirts, flannel, O. D. 

1 pair leggins, canvas 

1 pair shoes, marching 

This list may be slightly modified. 

Note that you are to supply yourself with underwear, 
socks, extra pair of shoes, if necessary, handkerchiefs, 
and toilet articles. 


re as ee ee ee 


5. After checking your property, make up your bed 
and arrange neatly your personal and issued property 
on or under your cot. Your company commander will, 
as soon as it is practicable, prescribe the manner in which 
beds are to be made up and property arranged. 

7. Get into uniform as soon as possible. 

8. Spend all your spare time the first day cleaning 


10 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


your rifle and bayonet. This will require several hours 
of hard work. Get a rag and rub the heavy grease off 
of them; then get a soft pine stick, pointed at one end, 
and with this point, remove the grease from the cracks, 
crevices, and corners. Clean the bore from the breech. 
When the heavy grease has been removed, the metal 
part of the gun, bore included, should be covered with a 
light coating of “3-in-1” oil. Heavy grease can be re- 
moved from the rifle by rubbing it with a rag which has 
been saturated with gasoline or coal oil. 

9. Don’t leave the company street on the first day, 
except with the permission of your company comman- 
der. Don’t ask for this permission unless you have a 
valid reason. 

10. You will have plenty of work to do the first day 
arranging your property, making up your bed, and 
cleaning your rifle and other ordnance property. 

11. Travel light. Bring only the bare necessities of 
life tocamp with you. Don’t bring a trunk. ‘Two suit- 
cases will hold more than enough. 

12. Report in uniform if you have one. 

13. Bring a pair of sneakers or slippers, also a com- 
plete bathing suit. 

14. The Government will provide you with a pair of 
shoes. However, if you can afford it, buy, before you 
reach camp, an extra pair of high-top tan shoes and have 
them well broken in by the time you reach camp. Rub- 
ber heels are recommended. 


GENERAL ADVICE 11 


RULES OF CONDUCT 


The first few days will be easy and profitable if you 
will read carefully and adhere to the followng plan of 
procedure: 

1. Get up at the first note of reveille and get quickly 
into proper uniform. Do not go to the toilet. 

2. Get within two or three feet of your place in ranks 
and await the sounding of assembly for reveille and then 
step into ranks. 

3. Stand at attention after the first sergeant com- 
mands “Fall In.” Remember that this command is 
equivalent to “Company, Attention.” 

4. After reveille go first to the toilet, then to your 
tent to make up your bed, arrange neatly your equip- 
ment, and clean up the ground under and around your 
cot. The company commander will require the beds 
made up and the equipment arranged in a prescribed 
way. 

5. Wash for breakfast. 

6. Upon returning from breakfast, go at once to the 
toilet. Next prepare the equipment prescribed to be 
worn to drill. This is especially important when the 
full pack is prescribed. Assist your tent mates in po- 
licing the ground in and around your tent. 

7. If you need medical attention give your name to 
the first sergeant at reveille and report to him at his tent 
upon your return from breakfast. Sick call is usually 
immediately after breakfast. Don’t wait until you are 


12 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


sick to report to the hospital, but go as soon as you feel 
in the least unwell. 

8. When the first call for drill is blown, put on your 
equipment, inspect your bed and property to see that 
everything is in order, and then go to your place in 
ranks. 

9, After the morning drill, get ready for dinner. Get 
a little rest at this time if possible. 

10. After dinner a short rest is usually allowed be- 
fore the afternoon drill. Take advantage of this op- 
portunity; get off your feet and rest. Be quiet so that 
your tent mates may rest. 

11. Following the afternoon drill there is a short in- 
termission before the ceremony of retreat. During this 
time take a quick bath, shave, get into the proper uni- 
form for retreat, shine your shoes and brush your clothes 
and hat. Be the neatest man in the company. 

12. Supper usually follows retreat. 

13. You will frequently be marched from supper to 
a lecture. 

14. After these lectures the saapene are dismissed. 
At Plattsburg in 1916 it was the custom of most com- 
pany commanders to hold company conferences in the 
company streets after these lectures. ‘These confer- 
ences were for the purpose of reviewing the day’s work 
and going over that of the next day. The acting non- 
commissioned officers were required, and all other men 
invited and encouraged, to attend. 

15. Be in bed with lights out at taps. After taps and 


GENERAL ADVICE 13 


before reveille remain silent, thus showing consideration 
for those who are sleeping or trying to sleep. 

16. Consult the company bulletin board at least twice 
daily. On this bulletin board is usually found the fol- 
lowing information: 

(a) A list of calls. 

(b) The proper uniform for each formation. 
(c) Schedule of drills. 

(d) Special orders and instructions. 

17. Get all your orders from (a) the bulletin board, 
(b) the first sergeant, (c) the acting noncommissioned 
officers, (d) the company commander. Don’t put much 
faith in rumors. 


ADVICE REGARDING HABITS 


Your life at a federal training camp in regard to 
food, exercise, hours of sleep, surroundings, and com- 
forts will differ greatly from that which you are now 
leading. You will submit your body to a sudden severe 
physical test. In order to prepare your body for this 
change in manner of living and work we recommend 
that for a short time prior to your arrival in camp and 
thereafter; you observe the following suggestions: 

1. Use no alcohol of any kind. 

2. Stop smoking, or at least be temperate in the use 
of tobacco. 

8. Eat and drink moderately. Chew your food well. 
It is advisable, however, to drink a great deal of cool 
(not cold) water between meals. 


14 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


4. Don’t eat between meals. 

5. Accustom yourself to regular hours as to sleep- 
ing, eating, and the morning functions. 

6. Keep away from all soda fountains and soft drink 
stands. | 

7. For at least two weeks prior to your arrival at 
camp take regularly the exercises described in this book. 

Most men are troubled with their feet during the first 
week of each camp, usually because they do not observe 
the following precautions: 

1. If you have ever had trouble with the arches of 
your feet, wear braces for them. 

2. Lace your shoe as tightly as comfort will permit. 

3. Wash the feet daily. 

4. Every morning shake a little talcum powder or 
“Foot Ease” in each shoe. 

5. Each morning put on a fresh pair of socks. Your 
socks should fit the feet so neatly that no wrinkles re- 
main in them and yet not be so tight that they bind the 
foot. Do not wear a sock with a hole in it or one that 
has been darned. 

6. Do not wear silk or cotton socks until you have 
given light wool socks a fair trial. Some men cannot 
wear with comfort light wool socks. 

7. Incase of a blister treat it as directed in Chapter X. 

8. Most of the foot troubles are caused by wearing 
shoes that do not fit properly. If the shoe is too large 
it rubs blisters, if too small it cramps the foot and causes 
severe pain. Marching several hours while carrying 


GENERAL ADVICE 15 


about thirty pounds of equipment causes each foot to 
expand at least one half a size in length and corre- 
spondingly in breadth; hence the size of the shoe you 
wear in the office will be too small for training-camp 
use. If you have been living a sedentary life, ask for 
a pair of shoes larger than you ordinarily wear. 

9. In case the tendon in your heel becomes tender, 
report at once to the hospital tent and get it strapped. 


CADET STATUS 


The official and social relation that is to exist between 
you and the regular army officers on duty at the camp 
will be the same as that which exists at West Point be- 
tween the cadets and the regular army officers over 
them. In ranks and at drill your officers will accord 
you the same strictly impersonal and military treatment 
which is accorded an enlisted man in the regular army. 
When not in ranks your relation with the regular army 
officer will be that of one gentleman to another, with 
the exception that the military salute takes the place 
of the civilian voice salutation or greeting. You should 
feel no hesitancy whatsoever about going to your com- 
pany officer at any time that they are unoccupied to ask 
for information or advice; however, you should always 
remember that these officers are exceedingly busy men 
and conduct yourself accordingly. very company of- 
ficer desires to know each man in his company more in- 
timately than is permitted by strictly official relations. 
Endeavor, therefore, to have a short, quiet, social chat 


16 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


with him at some appropriate time, such as Sunday, 
when you know he is not tired or busy. In the evening 
he will frequently want to rest, study, or write letters; 
hence at this time do not make your visit too long. 


A DISCIPLINED SOLDIER 


You will be expected to become quickly amenable 
both mentally and physically to discipline. A clear con- 
ception on your part of what drills are disciplinary in 
character and what discipline really is will help you to 
become a disciplined soldier. Drills executed at at- 
tention are disciplinary exercises and are designed to 
teach precise and soldierly movements and to incul- 
cate that prompt and subconscious obedience which is 
essential to proper military control. Hence, all cor- 
rections should be given and received in an impersonal 
manner. Never forget that you lose your identity as 
an individual when you step into ranks; you then be- 
come merely a unit of a mass. As soon as you obey 
properly, promptly, and, at times, unconsciously the 
commands of your officers, as soon as you can cheerfully 
give up pleasures and personal privileges that conflict 
with the new order of life which you have submitted, 
you will then have become a disciplined man. 


DRESS 


The uniform you will wear stands for Duty, Honor, 
and Country. .You should not disgrace it by the way 
you wear it or by your conduct any more than you would 


GENERAL ADVICE ™ 17 


trample the flag of the United States of America under 
foot. You must constantly bear in mind that in our 
country a military organization is too often judged by 
the acts of a few of its members. When one or two sol- 
diers in uniform conduct themselves in an ungentle- 
manly or unmilitary manner to the disgrace of the uni- 
form, the layman shakes his head and ecndemns all men 
wearing that uniform. Hence, show by the way in 
which you wear your uniform that you are proud of it; 
this can best be accomplished by observing the following 
rules: 

1. Carry yourself at all times as though you were 
proud of yourself, your uniform, and your country. 

2. Wear your hat so that the brim is parallel to the 
ground. 

3. Have all buttons fastened. 
. Never have sleeves rolled up. 
. Never wear sleeve holders. 
. Never leave shirt or coat unbuttoned at the throat. 
. Have leggins and trousers properly laced. 
. Keep shoes shined. 

. Always be clean shaved. 

10. Keep head up and shoulders square. 

11. Camp life has a tendency to make one careless as 
to personal cleanliness. Bear this in mind. 


Oo OED Oe 


SALUTING 


“The military salute is universal. It is at foundation 
but a courteous recognition between two individuals of 


18 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


their common fellowship in the same honorable profes- 
sion, the prefession of arms. Regulations require that 
it be rendered by both the senior and the junior, as bare 
courtesy requires between gentlemen in civil life.” It 
is the military equivalent of the laymen’s expressions 
“Good Morning,” or “How do you do?” ‘Therefore be 
punctilious about saluting all regular army officers; be 
proud of the manner in which you execute your salute. 
and make it indicative of discipline and good breeding. 
Always look at the officer you are saluting. The junior 
salutes first. It is very unmilitary to salute with the 
hands in the pocket, or with a cigarette, cigar, or pipe 
in the mouth. Observe the following general rules: 

1. Never salute an officer when you are in ranks. 

2. Indoors (in your tent) unarmed, do not salute but 
stand at attention, uncovered, on the entrance of an 
officer. 

3. Indoors, armed, render the prescribed salute, 1.e., 
the rifle salute at order arms or at ‘trail. 

4. Outdoors, armed, render the prescribed salute, ~ 
i.e., the rifle salute at right shoulder arms. 

5. Outdoors, unarmed, or armed with side arms, but 
covered, salute with the right hand. 


ARMY SLANG 


The following army slang is universally employed: 

‘“Bunkie’—the soldier who shares the shelter half or 
tent of a comrade in the field. A bunkie looks after his 
comrade’s property in the event the latter is absent. 


GENERAL ADVICE 19 


“Doughboy’’—the infantryman. 

“French leave’—unauthorized absence. 

“Holy Joe’—the chaplain. 

“K. O.”—the commanding officer. 

“On the carpet”—a call before the commanding officer 
for admonition. 

“Q. M.”—quartermaster. 

“Rookie’—a new recruit. 

“Sand rat’—a soldier on duty in the rifle pit dur- 
ing target practice. 

“Top sergeant’”’—the first sergeant. 

“Come and get it’”—the meal is ready to be served. 


TENTATIVE REGULATIONS ! 


A Student may attend when practicable, two or three 
camps in the same year but transportation will be fur- 
nished for only one camp. 

An applicant for admission to his first camp must 
be vouched for as to his good moral chavacter by the 
holder of a Red, White or Blue certificate, or by two 
other reputable citizens, or he must present a satisfac- 
tory discharge from the Federal Training Camp ‘for 
Boys. 


FINAL SUGGESTIONS 


Each man attending a Federal Train camp can buy 
any part of the ordnance equipment issued to him. 
This includes a rifle. 


1 These tentative regulations are at present (February 20, 1917) being 
compiled. ‘They are, therefore, subject to change. 


20 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


Don’t be profane or tell questionable stories to your 
bunkies or around the company. There is a much 
greater number of silent and unprotesting men in camp 
than is generally supposed to whom this is offensive. 
Keep everything on a high plane. 


CECA RACER ying 


Read this chapter as soon as you decide to attend a 
Federal Training Camp. 


PHYSICAL EXERCISE 


The greatest problem you will have to solve will be 
that of making your body do the work required. Every 
one else will be doing exactly what you are doing, and 
you have too much pride to want to take even a shorter 
step than the man by your side. Some men have to 
leave the training camps because they are not in the 
proper physical condition to go on with the work. If 
this chapter is taken as seriously as it should be, it will be 
of great help to you. 

If you have not a pair of sensible marching shoes 
(tan, high-tops, no hooks on them) get a pair. ‘These 
shoes should be considerably larger than a pair of office 
shoes. 

Walk to and from your business. ‘Take every op- 
portunity to get out in the country where the air is 
pure. Fill your lungs full. Get into the habit of 
taking deep breaths now and then. Don’t make this a 
task, but surround it with pleasantries. Get some de- 
lightful companion to walk with you. Walk vigorously. 


1 These exercises are selected from those commonly given by Major 
H. J, Koehler, United States Army. 
21 


22 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


Let down on your smoking. Better to leave it alone 
for a while. You will enjoy the air. Deep breathing 
seems to be more natural. 

Make it a work for your country. View it in that 
light. If you are not going to be called upon to un- 
dergo the cruel hardships and physical strain of some 
campaigns, your son will be, and you can be of great 
help to him by being fit yourself. You and your sons 
will form the backbone of America’s strength in her 
next peril. 

You will have a great deal of walking after you arrive 
in eamp, possibly a great deal more than you have ever 
had, and probably a great deal more than you expect, 
even with this word of warning. If you have failed 
to provide yourself with proper shoes and socks, great 
will be the price of your lack of forethought. You will 
wince at your own blisters. You will get no sympathy 
from any one else. It is the spirit of the camp for each 
man to bear his own burdens. So arrive at camp with 
hardened legs and broken in shoes. Don’t buy shoes 
with pointed or narrow toes. ‘They should be broad 
and airy. 

Immediately after you arise in the morning and just 
before you retire at night, go through the following 
exercises for two or three minutes. Ina short time you 
may want to make it more. No objection. Give it a 
fair trial. Be brisk and energetic. Forget, for the 
time being, what you are going to get out of it. Give 
and then give more. The result will take care of itself. 


PHYSICAL EXERCISE 23 


Ist EXERCISE 


Involving practically every important muscle in the 


body. 


SOE 


RS, © 


No. 1 oN Oo 


From first position spring to second position; instantly return 
to first position and continue. 

Be light on your feet. Alight on your toes. Begin with a 
limited number of times. Day by day increase it a little until you 
reach a fair number. Be most moderate at first. Never allow 
yourself in any exercise to become greatly fatigued. 


24 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


2p EXERCISE 


To reduce waist, strengthen back muscles, and be- 
come limber. 


No.) No. 2 


Assume position No. 1. 

Swing to position (No. 2), return at once to No. 1, and continue. 

Shoot your head and arms as far through your legs as your 
conformation permits. 


PHYSICAL EXERCISE 25 


8rpD EXERCISE 


To harden leg muscles and exercise joints. 


No. 1 


From position No. 1 come to position No. 2. Return at once to 
No. 1 and continue. 

Toes turned well out. Body and head erect. Up with a slight 
spring. After a little practice, you will have no difficulty with this 
exercise in balancing yourself. 


26 THK PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


47H EXERCISE 


To exercise arms and shoulders and organs of chest 
and shoulder muscles. 


From position No. 1 thrust 
arms forward to position No. 
2, and return at once to posi- 
tion No. 1. 


No. 1 £ 


Vary by thrusting 
arms downward, side- 
ward and upward. 
Be moderate at first. 
Grow more vigorous 
with practice. 


No. 2 


PHYSICAL EXERCISE 27 


5TH EXERCISE 


7 To strengthen ankles and 


insteps. 


From position No. 1 rise on 
the toes to position No. 2, re- 


turn at once to position No. 1, 
and continue. 


7 

© 

—_ 
4 


Go up on your toes as high 
as you can. 


CHAPTER III 


SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER 


Success in battle is the ultimate object of all military 
training; hence the excellence of an organization 1s 
judged by its field efficiency. Your instruction will be 
progressive in character, and will have as its ultimate 
purpose the creation of a company measuring up to a 
high standard of field efficiency. 

The Preparatory Command, such as Forward, in- 
dicates the movement that is to be executed. 

The Command of Execution, such as MARCH, 
HALT, or ARMS, commences the execution of the 
movement. 

Preparatory Commands are distinguished by bold 
face, those of execution by capitals. As, 1. Forward, 
2. MARCH. 

The average man understands better and learns faster 
when you show him how a thing is done. Don’t be 
content with telling him how. Bear this in mind when 
you become an instructor. 

On account of the absence of the Regular Army on 
the border, it was not practical to obtain photographs 
of regular troops with which to illustrate this book. 
The photographs used were taken under the direct 


supervision of the authors. 
28 


SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER 29 


POSITION OF A SOLDIER AT ATTENTION 


No. 1 No. 2 


CORRECT POSITION 


No. 1. Don’t gaze 
about. That’s not play- 
ing the game. 

No. 2. Don’t slouch. 
Hold yourself up. Keep 
your eyes off the ground. 


These are the common 
errors of beginners. 


No. 1. Eyes to,the front. 
Hands hang naturally. Rest 
weight of body equally on 
feet. Feet turned out making 
angles of 45°. 

No. 2. Head erect. Shoul- 
ders down and back. Chest 
out. Stomach up. Thumb 
along seams of __ trousers. 
Knees straight, not stiff. 
Heels on line and together. 


No. 1 No. 2 
INCORRECT POSITIONS 


- 


30 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


No. 1 No. 2 
CORRECT POSITION 


No. 1. Not looking straight 
to the front. Right foot not 
carried straight to the rear. 

No. 2. Leaning back too 
far. Right foot carried back 
too far. 


1. Parade, 2. REST. 


No. 1. Clasp hands with- 
out constraint in front of 
center of body. Left hand 
uppermost. Fingers joined. 
Thumb and fore finger right 
hand clasps the left thumb. 

No. 22, . Bend = dlett<.knec 
slightly. Right foot is car- 
ried 6 inches straight to the 
rear. | | 


No. 1 No. 2 
INCORRECT POSITIONS 


SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER 31 


1. Hand, 2. SALUTE. 


CORRECT POSITION 


No. 1. Look toward the person saluted. . 

No. 2. Tip of forefinger right hand touches cap or hat above 
right eye. Thumb and forefingers extended and joined. Hand and 
wrist straight. Palm to the left. 


32 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


1. Hand, 2. SALUTE. 


No. 1 No. 2 INO 3 


INCORRECT POSITIONS OR COMMON ERRORS 


No. 1. Palm of the hand to the front and fingers not joined. 

No. 2. Arm held too high. Fingers not perfectly joined. 

No. 3. Fingers not extended and joined. Left hand not by 
side while salute is being made. 

Some beginners forget, while saluting, to remove their pipes, 
cigarettes, or cigars from their mouths. This proves clearly that 
they are beginners, for trained and experienced men are careful 
about military honors and salutes. 


THE RESTS 


Being at a halt, the commands are: FALL OUT; REST; AT 
EASE; and, 1. Parade, 2. REST. 
At the command fall out, the men may leave the ranks, but are 


SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER 33 


required to remain in the immediate vicinity. They resume their 
former places, at attention, at the command fall in. 

At the command rest, each man keeps one foot in place, but is 
not required to preserve silence or immobility. 

At the command at ease, each man keeps one foot in place and 
is required to preserve silence, but not immobility. 

1. Parade, 2. REST. Previously explained. 

To resume the attention: 1. Squad, 2. ATTENTION. The 


men take the position of the soldier. 


EYES RIGHT OR LEFT 
1. Eyes, 2. RIGHT (LEFT), 3. FRONT. 


At the command right, turn the head to the right oblique, eyes 
fixed on the line of eyes of the men in, or supposed to be in, the 
same rank, At the command front, turn the head and eyes to the 


front. Notice the right file does not turn the eyes to the right. 


34 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


FACINGS 
To the flank: 1. Right (left), 2. FACE. 


Raise slightly the left heel and 
right toe; face to the right, turning 
on the right heel, assisted by a slight 
pressure on the ball of the left foot; 
place the left foot by the side of the 
right. Left face is executed on the 
left heel in the corresponding man- 
ner. 


Right (left) Half Face is executed similarly, facing 45°. 

To the rear: 1. About, 2. FACE. 

Carry the toe of the right foot about a half foot-length to the 
rear and slightly to the left of the left heel without changing the 
position of the left foot; face to the rear, turning to the right 
on the left heel and right toe; place the right heel by the side of 
the left. There is no left about face. 


SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER 35 
STEPS AND MARCHINGS 


All steps and marchings executed from a halt, except 
right step, begin with the left foot. 

The length of the full step in quick time is 30 inches, 
measured from heel to heel, and the cadence is at the 
rate of 120 steps per minute. 

The length of the full step in double time is 36 inches; 
the cadence is at the rate of 180 steps per minute. 

The instructor, when necessary, indicates the cadence 
of the step by calling one, two, three, four, or left, 
right, the instant the left and right foot, respectively, 
should be planted. | 

All steps and marchings and movements involving 
march are executed in quick time unless the squad be 
marching in double time, or double time be added to the 
command; in the latter case double time is added to the 
preparatory command. Example: 1. Squad right, 
double time, 2. MARCH (School of the Squad). 


QUICK TIME 


Being at a halt, to march forward in quick tities als 
Forward, 2. MARCH. 

At the command forward, shift the weight of the 
body to the right leg, left knee straight. 

At the command march, move the left foot smartly 
straight forward 30 inches from the right, sole near the 
ground, and plant it without shock; next, in like man- 
ner, advance the right foot and plant it as above; con- 
tinue the march. The arms swing naturally. 


36 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


Being at a halt, or in march in quick time, to march 
in double time: 1. Double time, 2. MARCH. 

If at a halt, at the first command shift the weight of 
the body to the right leg. At the command march, 
raise the forearms, fingers closed, to a horizontal posi- 
tion along the waist line; take up an easy run with the 
step and cadence of double time, allowing a natural 
swinging motion to the arms. | 

If marching in quick time, at the command march, 
given as either foot strikes the ground, take one step in 
quick time, and then step off in double time. 

To resume the quick time: 1. Quick time, 2. 
MARCH. 

At the command march, given as either foot strikes 
the ground, advance and plant the other foot in double 
time; resume the quick time, dropping the hands by 
the sides. 

TO MARK TIME 


Being in march: 1. Mark time, 2. MARCH. 

At the command march, given as either foot strikes 
the ground, advance and plant the other foot; bring up 
the foot in rear and continue the cadence by alternately 
raising each foot about 2 inches and planting it on line 
with the other. 

Being at a halt, at the command march, raise and 
plant the feet as prescribed above. Common errors 
are to raise the feet several inches and to run up the 
cadence, 1.e., go too fast. 


1. Half step, 2. MARCH. 


SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER 37 


Take steps of 15 inches in quick time, 18 inches in 
double time. 

Forward, half step, halt, and mark time may be 
executed one from the other in quick or double time. 
Any step less than the full step (ie., half step, right 
step, or backward) is apt to be too fast, ie., greater 
than 120 steps a minute. 

To resume the full step from half step or mark time: 


1. Forward, 2. MARCH. 


SIDE STEP 


Being at a halt or mark time: 1. Right (left) step, 
2. MARCH. 

Carry and plant the right foot 15 inches to the right; 
bring the left foot beside it and continue the movement 
in the cadence of quick time. 

The side step is used for short distances only and is 
not executed in double time. 

If at order arms, the side step is executed at trail 
without command. 


BACK STEP 

Being at a halt or mark time: 1. Backward, 2. 
MARCH. 

Take steps of 15 inches straight to the rear. 

The back step is used for short distances only and is 
not executed in double time. 

If at order arms, the back step is executed at trail 
without command, 


, 
38 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


TO HALT 


To arrest the march in quikk or double time: 1.. 
Squad, 2. HALT. | 

At the command halt, given as either foot rorites the 
ground, plant the other foot as in marching; raise and 
place the first foot by the side of the other. If in double 
time, drop the hands by the sides. 


TO MARCH BY THE FLANK 
Being in march: 1. By the right (left) flank, 2. MARCH. 


The command march must 
be given when the _ right 
foot is on the ground as 
shown in No, 1. Then ads 
vance and plant the left foot 
and turn on the toes to right 
as shown in No. 2, and step 
off with the left foot. 


No. 1 No. 2 


a 


Ss} 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER 39 
TO MARCH TO THE REAR 
Being in march: 1. To the rear, 2. MARCH. 


At the command march, given as the right foot strikes the 
ground, advance and plant the left foot; turn to the right about 
on the balls of both feet and immediately step off with the left 
foot. 


The turn is made on the toes as shown. 

The command march must be: given when 
the right foot is on the ground. The left foot 
is then advanced to the position shown. 

If marching in double time, turn to the right 
about, taking four steps in place, keeping the 
cadence, and then step off with the left foot. 


CHANGE STEP 


Being in march: 1. Change step, 2. MARCH. 

At the command march, given as the right foot strikes 
the ground, advance and plant the left foot; plant the 
toe of the right foot near the heel of the left and step 
off with the left foot. 

The change on the right foot is similarly executed, 
the command march being given as the left foot strikes 
the ground. 


40 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


MANUAL OF ARMS 


To acquire proficiency in the Manual of Arms, you 
should practice, practice, and practice. 
Position of order arms standing, 1.e., the position of 


attention under arms. 


No. 1. Arm and hands _ hang 
naturally. Right hand holding 
piece between thumb and fingers. 
Butt rests evenly on ground. Bar- 
rel to the rear. 

* eNov:2.” Bde of theo butions 
line with toe of and touching the 
right shoe. 


4 
a 


ONO a tere Nags 


CORRECT POSITION 


To execute the movements in detail, the instructor first cautions: 
“By the Numbers’; all movements, divided into motions, are then 
executed singly. ‘That is to say, make one motion and then wait 
until a further command for another. This is for the purpose of 
correcting erroneous positions and giving detailed instructions. 
We are explaining the manual by the numbers. 


SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER Ay 


Being at order arms: 1. Present, 
2. ARMS. It takes two counts. 


At command arms, with the right 
hand carry the piece in _ front 
of the center of the body. Barrel 
to the rear and vertical. Grasp it 
with le:t hand at the balance. Left 
forearm is horizontal and_ rests 
against body. The balance of the 
piece is approximately the position of 
the rear sight. 


FIRST POSITION OF PRESENT ARMS FROM ORDER ARMS 


At command two, grasp the 
small of the stock with the right 
hand. 


i 


CORRECT POSITION OF PRESENT ARMS 


42 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


No. 1 No. 2 


INCORRECT POSITION OF PRESENT ARMS 


These are the common errors made by beginners. 


No. 1. Thumb along barrel. 

No. 2. Piece held too low. The front sight will be a little above 
the eyes when the left fore arm is horizontal. 

No. 3. Piece not vertical; too close to body. 


SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER 4.3 


Being at order arms: 1. Port, 2. ARMS, It takes one count. 


CORRECT POSITION OF PORT ARMS 


At the command of arms, with the right hand raise and throw the 
piece diagonally across the body, grasp it smartly with both hands; 
the right, palm down, at the small of stock; the left, palm up, at the 
balance; barrel up, sloping to the left and crossing opposite the 
junction of the neck with the left shoulder; right forearm horizontal; 
left forearm resting against the body. The rifle is held in a verti- 
cal plane parallel to the front. 


Ad. THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


In executing this movement, it is a common error with beginners 
to raise the piece as though it weighed much more than it does. 
No part of the body should move except the arms, in coming to 


“port arms” from “order arms.” 


No. 1 No. 2 . No. 3 


INCORRECT POSITIONS OF PORT ARMS 


No. 1. Arms held away from side. 
No. 2. Piece held too low and too close to body. 
No. 3. Piece held too high and not in a vertical plane parallel 


to the body. 


SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER AS 


Being at present arms: 1. Port, 2. ARMS. It is executed in 
one count. At the command arms, carry the piece diagonally 
across the body and take the position of “port arms.” 

Being at port arms: 1. Present, 2. ARMS. It is executed in 
one count. At the command arms, carry the piece to a vertical 
position in front of the center of the body and take the position 
of present arms. 

Being at present or port arms: 1. Order, 2. ARMS. It is 
executed in two counts. 


At the command arms, let 
go with the right hand; lower 
and carry the piece to the right 
with the left hand; regrasp it 
with the'right hand just above 
the lower band; let go with the 
left hand and take the position 
shown here, which is the next 
to the last position in coming 
to the order. The left hand 
should be above and near the 
right, steadying the gun, fingers 
extended and joined, forearm 
and wrist straight and inclined 
downward. Barrel to the rear. 


All the fingers of the right 


hand grasp the gun. Butt 
| about 3 inches from the ground. 


NEXT TO THE LAST POSITION OF ORDER ARMS 


Being in the above position, at the command Two, lower the 
piece gently to the ground with the right hand, drop the left hand 
quickly by the side, and take the position of order arms. 

The common errors are to slam the gun down on the ground and 
to drop the left hand by the side in a slow and indifferent manner. 


46 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 


. 


INCORRECT POSITIONS 


Common errors in the next to the last position of order arms. 


No. 1. Thumb is up. Gun too far from the ground. 

No. 2. Gun too near to ground. Thumb is up. Butt of gun 
too far to the right. 

No. 38. Gun held too high and too far away from body. 

Being at order arms: 1. Right shoulder, 2. ARMS. It is exe- 
cuted in three counts. 


SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER 47 


At the command arms, with 
the right hand raise and throw the 
piece diagonally across the body; 
carry the right hand quickly to 
the butt, and grasp the heel be- 
tween the first two fingers as 
shown. Note the position of the 
first two fingers of right hand. 


THE FIRST POSITION OF RIGHT 
SHOULDER ARMS FROM 
THE ORDER 


| i ae aes 


NEXT TO THE LAST POSITION OF RIGHT SHOULDER ARMS 


At the command two, with- 
out changing the grasp of the 
right hand, place the piece on 
the right shoulder, right elbow 
near the side, the piece in a 
vertical plane perpendicular to 
the front; carry the left hand, 
thumb and fingers extended 
and joined, to the small of the 
stock, wrist straight and elbow 
down. Barrel up, and inclined 
at an angle of about 45° from 
the horizontal. Trigger guard 
in the hollow of the shoulder, 
tip of forefinger touching the 
cocking piece. Right fore arm 
horizontal. 


48 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


Nope! NOs NO 


COMMON ERRORS IN THE NEXT TO THE LAST POSITION 
OF RIGHT SHOULDER ARMS 


No. 1. Right arm not by side. Left arm too high. Remember 
that the left arm rests on the chest. This is very commonly con- 
fused with rifle salute. 

No. 2. Thumb is up. Butt of rifle carried to the right. 

No. 3. Trigger guard not against shoulder. Butt held too low. 
Hand not straight. 


SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER 49 


No. 1. Right arm 
not by side. Right 
forearm not horizon- 
tal. 

No. 2. Heel of gun 
too far to left. 

No 3. Trigger guaid 
not against shoulder. 
Butt held too low. 


At the command three, 
drop the left hand by the 
side. 


. “se 3 
4 ms 


No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 


INCORRECT POSITION OF RIGHT SHOULDER ARMS 


50 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


Being at right shoulder 
Arms: 1. Order, 2. ARMS. It 


is executed in 3 counts. 


Press the butt down quickly 
and throw the gun diagonally 
across the body, to the position 
shown here. 

At the command two, 
lower the gun and assume the 
next to the last position of 
order arms. At the command 
three, come to the order arms. 


The common errors in this 
movement are to move the head 
to the left and to throw the gun 
too far to the front. 


Being at port arms: 1. Right shoulder, 2. ARMS. 
It is executed in three counts. 

At the command arms, change the right hand to the 
butt. 

At the command two and three, come to the right 
shoulder as from order arms. 

Being at right shoulder arms: 1. Port, 2. ARMS. 
It is executed in two counts. 

At the command arms, press the butt down quickly 
and throw the piece to the diagonal position across the 
body with the left hand grasping it at the balance; the 
right hand retaining its grasp of the butt. 

At the command two, change the right hand to the 
small of the stock. 


SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER 51 


Being at right shoulder arms: 1. Present, 2. 
ARMS. It is executed in three counts. 

At the command arms, execute port arms. (This 
requires two counts.) At the command three, execute 
present arms. . 

Being at present arms: 1. Right shoulder, 2. 
ARMS. It is executed in four counts. 

At the command arms, execute port arms. At the 
command two, three, four, execute right shoulder arms 
as from port arms. 

Being at port arms: 1. Left shoulder, 2. ARMS. It is exe- 


cuted in two counts. 


THE NEXT TO THE LAST POSITION OF THE LEFT 
SHOULDER ARMS 


52 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


At the command Arms, carry the piece with the right hand and 
place it on the left shoulder; at the same time grasp the butt with 
the left hand, heel between first and second fingers. Thumb and 
fingers of right hand closed on the stock. Barrel up, trigger guard 
in the hollow of the shoulder. 


hood No: 0: coerebae be NaS 


COMMON ERRORS IN THE NEXT TO THE LAST POSITION 
OF LEFT SHOULDER ARMS 


No. 1. Right arm too high. Butt too high. 

No. 2. Butt too close to center of body. Not grasping gun 
correctly with fingers of left hand. 

No. 3. Right arm too high. Butt too high. 


SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER 53 


At the command two, 
drop the right hand by 
the side. 


THE CORRECT POSITION OF LEFT SHOULDER ARMS 


The incorrect positions are 
usually the same as are found in 
the right shoulder arms, and as 
illustrated here. 


54 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


Being at left shoulder arms: 1. Port, 2. ARMS. 


It is executed in two counts. 

At the command arms, grasp the piece with the right 
hand at the small of the stock. 

At the command two, carry the piece, with the right 
hand to the position of port arms, regrasp it with the 
left. 

Left shoulder arms may be ordered from the order, 
right shoulder or present, or the reverse. At the com- 
mand arms, executed port arms and continue to the 


position ordered. 
Being at order arms: 1. Parade, 2. REST, It is executed in 


one count. 


At the command rest, 
carry muzzle in front of the 
center of the body, barrel 
to the left. Grasp piece 
with the left hand just be- 
low the stacking swivel, and 
with the right hand below 
and against the left. Left 
knee slightly bent. Carry 
the right foot 6 inches 
straight to the rear. 


pees 


CORRECT POSITION OF PARADE REST 
Being at parade rest: 1. Squad, 2. ATTENTION, 


Executed in one count. 


A 


SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER 55 


At the command attention (it is a custom of the 
service to execute the movement at the last syllable of 
the command), resume the order, the left hand quitting 
the piece opposite the right hip. 


Being at order arms: 1. Trail, 2. ARMS. 

At the command arms, raise the piece, right arm slightly bent, 
and incline the muzzle forward so that the barrel makes an angle 
of about 30° with the vertical. 

When it can be done without danger or inconvenience to others, 
the piece may be grasped at the balance and the muzzle lowered 
until the piece is horizontal; a similar position in the left hand 


may be used. 


’ CORRECT POSITION OF TRAIL ARMS 


Being at trail arms: 1. Order, 2. ARMS. 
At the command arms, lower the gun with the right 
hand and resume the order. 


Being at right shoulder arms: 1. Rifle, 2. SALUTE, It is exe- 
cuted in two counts. 


56 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL - 


At the command 
salute, carry the left 
hand smartly to the 
small of the stock, fore- 
arm horizontal, palm of 
hand down, thumb and 
forefingers extended and 
joined. Look toward 
the person saluted. At 
the command two, drop 
the hand by the side; 
TUT, (06 Dead anne 
eyes —:to.) ithe 


Forefingers 


front. 
touching 
end of cocking piece. 


No. 1 


THE CORRECT POSITION OF 
RIFLE SALUTE, BEING AT 
RIGHT SHOULDER ARMS. 


No. 1. Left elbow too low. 
Forearm should be horizontal. 

No. 2. Left elbow too high. 
Fingers not extended and joined. 


COMMON ERRORS IN RIFLE 
SALUTE AT RIGHT SHOUL- 
DER ARMS. 


SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER 57 


be 


RIFLE SALUTE BEING AT ORDER 


No. 1. Fingers not extended 
and joined. 

No. 2. Fingers not joined. 
Gun held too high. 


COMMON ERRORS IN RIFLE SA- 
LUTE AT ORDER OR TRAIL 
ARMS 


Being at order or trail 


arms: 1. Rifle, 2. SALUTE. 


At the command salute, 
carry the left hand smartly 
to the right side, palm of 
the hand down, thumb and 
fingers extended and joined, 
forefinger against piece near 
the muzzle; look toward the 
person saluted. At the com- 
mand two, drop the left 
hand by the side; turn the 
head and eyes to the front. 


No. 1 No. 2 


58 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 
Being at order arms: 1. Fix, 2. BAYONET. 


If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the belt: execute 
parade rest; grasp the bayonet with the right hand, 
back of hand toward the body; draw the bayonet from 
the scabbard and fix it on the barrel, glancing at the 
muzzle; resume the order. | 

If the bayonet is carried on the haversack: draw the 
bayonet with the left hand and fix it in the most con- 
venient manner. 

Being at order arms: 1. Unfix, 2. BAYONET. 

If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the belt: Eix- 
ecute parade rest; grasp the handle of the bayonet firmly 
with the right hand, passing the spring with the fore- 
finger of the right hand; raise the bayonet until the 
handle is about 12 inches above the muzzle of the piece; 
drop the point to the left, back of the hand toward the 
body, and, glancing at the scabbard, return the bayonet, 
the blade passing between the left arm and the body; re- 
grasp the piece with the right hand and resume the order. 

If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the haversack: 
Take the bayonet from the rifle with the left hand and 
return it to the scabbard in the most convenient manner. 

If marching or lying down, the bayonet is fixed and 
unfixed in the most expeditious and convenient manner 
and the piece returned to the original position. 

Fix and unfix bayonet are executed with promptness 
and regularity but not in cadence. 

Exercises for instruction in bayonet combat are pre- 
scribed in the Manual for Bayonet Exercise. 


SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER 59 


Being at order arms: 1. Inspection, 2. ARMS. 


At the command arms, 
take the position of port 
arms; at the command 
two, seize the bolt handle 
with the thumb and fore- 
finger of the right hand, 
turn the handle up, draw 
the bolt back, and glance at 
the chamber. Having found 
the chamber empty, or hav- 
ing emptied it, raise the 
head and eyes to the front. 


INSPECTION ARMS 


It is a very common error to change the position of the piece 
while drawing the bolt back. Guard against this. 


Being at inspection arms: 1. Order (or right 
shoulder, or port), 2. ARMS. 

At the preparatory command (i.e., at the command 
order), push the bolt forward, turn the handle down, 
pull the trigger, and resume port arms. At the com- 
mand arms, complete the movement ordered. 


TO DISMISS THE SQUAD 


Being at a halt: 1. Inspection, 2, ARMS, 3. Port, 
4, ARMS, 5. DISMISSED. 


60 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


Make a point of becoming sufficiently familiar with 
the different parts of the rifle to obey the following 
general rules governing the manual. 

The following rules govern the carrying of the piece: 

First. The piece is not carried with cartridges in 
either the chamber or the magazine except when spe- 
cifically ordered. When so loaded, or supposed to be 
loaded, it is habitually carried locked; that is, with the 
safety lock turned to the “safe.” At all other times it 
is carried unlocked with the trigger pulled. 

Second. Whenever troops are formed under arms, 
pieces are immediately inspected at the commands: 1. 
Inspection, 2. ARMS, 3. Order (right shoulder, 
port), 4. ARMS. 

A similar inspection is made immediately before dis- 
missal. | 

If cartridges are found in the chamber or magazine 
they are removed and placed in the belt. 

Third. The cut-off is kept turned “off” except when 
cartridges are actually used. 

Fourth. 'The bayonet is not fixed except in bayonet 
exercise, on guard, or for combat. 

Fifth. all in is executed with the piece at the order 
arms. Fall out, rest, and at ease are executed as with- 
out arms. On resuming attention the position of order 
arms is taken. . 

Sixth. If at the order, unless otherwise prescribed, 
the piece is brought to the right shoulder at the com- 
mand march, the three motions corresponding with the 


\ 


NR 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER 


first three steps. Movements may be executed at the 
trail by prefacing the preparatory command with the 
words at trail; as, 1. At trail, forward, 2. MARCH; 
the trail is taken at the command march. 

When the facings, alignments, open and close ranks, 
taking interval or distance, and assemblings are exe- 
cuted from the order, raise the piece to the trail while in 
motion and resume the order on halting. 

Seventh. ‘The piece is brought to the order on halt- 
ing. ‘The execution of the order begins when the halt 
is completed. 

Eighth. A disengaged hand in double time is held 
as when without arms. 

The following rules govern the execution of the 
manual of arms: 

First. In all positions of the left hand at the balance 
(center of gravity, bayonet unfixed) the thumb clasps 
the piece; the sling is included in the grasp of the hand. 

-Second. In all positions of the piece, “diagonally 
across the body” the position of the piece, left arm and 
hand are the same as in port arms. 

Third. In resuming the order from any position in 
the manual, the motion next to the last concludes with 
the butt of the piece about 3 inches from the ground, 
barrel to the rear, the left hand above and near the 
right, steadying the piece, fingers extended and joined, 
forearm and wrist straight and inclining downward, all 
fingers of the right hand grasping the piece. ‘To com- 
plete the order, lower the piece gently to the ground 


THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


with the right hand, drop the left quickly by the side, 
and take the position of order arms. 

Allowing the piece to drop through the right hand to 
the ground, or other similar abuse of the rifle to produce 
effect in executing the manual, is prohibited. | 

Fourth. ‘The cadence of the motions is that of quick 
time; the recruits are first required to give their whole 
attention to the details of the motions, the cadence being 
gradually acquired as they become accustomed to hand- 
ling their pieces. 'The instructor may require them to 
count aloud in cadence with the motions. 

Fifth. The manual is taught at a halt and the move- 
ments are, for the purpose of instruction, divided into 
motions and executed in detail; in this case the com- 
mand of execution determines the prompt execution of 
the first motion, and the commands, two, three, four, 
that of the other motions. 

To execute the movements in detail, the instructor 
first cautions: By the numbers; all movements divided 
into motions are then executed as above explained until 
he cautions: Without the numbers; or commands 
movements other than those in the manual of arms. 

Sixth. Whenever circumstances require, the regular 
positions of the manual of arms and the firings may be 
ordered without regard to the previous position of the 
piece. 

Under exceptional conditions of weather or fatigue 
the rifle may be carried in any manner directed. 


| 
LJ 


CHAPTER IV 
SCHOOL OF THE SQUAD 


CLOSE ORDER DRILLS 


For several days after reporting you will undergo 
many hours of close order drill. You will ask yourself, 
“Why is all this mental and physical strain necessary 
when these exercises are not used in battle?’ The 
answer is: they are disciplinary exercises and are de- 
signed to inculcate that prompt and_ subconscious 
obedience which is essential to proper military control 
and to teach you precise and soldierly movements; 
hence, they are executed at attention. 


SQUAD 


Deploy. ‘To extend the front. A squad deploys 
when it goes “As skirmishers.” 

File. 'Two men, the front rank man and the cor- 
responding man in the rear rank. The front rank man 
is the file leader. A file which has no rear rank man is 
a blank file. 

Interval. Space between elements of the same line. 
The interval between men in ranks is 4 inches and is 
measured from elbow to elbow. It is to get this in- 
terval that each man is required to raise his arm when* 


the company is formed. 
63 


64 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


Distance. Space between elements in the direction 
of depth. It is measured from the back of the man in 
front to the breast of the man in rear. The rear rank 
when in line or column is 40 inches from the front rank. 

The guide of a squad in line is right unless otherwise 
announced. 

The guide of a squad deployed, (i.e., skirmishes) is 
center unless otherwise announced. 


TO FORM THE SQUAD 


To form the squad the instructor places himself 3 
paces in front of where the center is to be and com- 
mands: Fall in. 

The men assemble at attention, pieces at the order, 
and are arranged’ by the corporal in double rank, as 
nearly as practicable in order of height from right to 
left, each man dropping his left hand as soon as the 
man on his left has his interval. The rear rank forms 
with distance of 40 inches. | 

The instructor then commands: Count off. 

At this command all except the right file execute eyes 
right, and beginning on the right, the men in each rank 
count one, two, three, four; each man turns his head and 
eyes to the front as he counts. 

Pieces are then inspected. 


1 
ites | 


The purpose of putting the left hand on the hip is to 
get enough elbow room. A man should have sufficient 
space to operate his piece. These four-inch intervals 


give it to him. 


{ps} [es] Fe) fea) A 22 


es EO, we ee 
° 


BI Front 
eae ie XI Rank 


Note the space _ between 
elbows (interval) is 4 inches. 
The space between the front 
and rear rank (distance) is 40 
inches, and is measured from 
the back of the man in front to 
the breast of the man in the 
rear. 


66 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


ALIGN MENTS 


To align the squad, the base file or files having been 
established: 1. Right (left), 2. DRESS, 3. FRONT. 

At the command dress, all men place the left hand 
upon the hip (whether dressing to the right or left) ; 
each man, except the base file, when on or near the new 
lines executes eyes right, and, taking steps of 2 or 3 
inches, places himself so that his right arm rests lightly 
against the arm of the man on his right, and so that his 
eyes and shoulders are in line with those of the men on 
his right; the rear rank men cover in file. 

The instructor verifies the alignment of both ranks 
from the right flank and orders up or back such men 


SCHOOL OF THE SQUAD 67 


as may be in the rear, or in advance, of the line; only 
the men designated move. 

At the command front, given when the ranks are 
aligned, each man turns his head and eyes to the front 
and drops his left hand by his side. 

There are in dressing a number of common errors 
that we should try to avoid. Don’t jab the man on 
your left with your elbow. If you are not on the line, 
move your feet. Don’t lean forward or backward. 
Be sure to touch gently the man on your right with 
your right arm. Be certain to keep your left elbow 
forced well to the front. This is a little uncomfortable 
at first, but unless we do this our arms will not measure 
the 4 inches correctly. Don’t hump up the left 
shoulder, and don’t turn the shoulders to the right. 
Keep fingers of left hand extended and joined. 

We want to place especial stress on the importance 
of three movements in the school of the squad. When 
you have thoroughly mastered these three, you will have 
a splendid basis for the remainder of the School of the 
Squad, the full value of which you will later appreciate. 
These are: Squad right, Squad right about, and Right 
turn. 

The first line drawing in this chapter shows correct 
proportions of interval and distance. ‘To save space 
and for convenience, the drawings hereafter are made 
without regard to proportions (intervals and distances) . 


68 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


First MovEMENT 
SQUAD RIGHT 


Being in line, to turn and march: 1. Squad right 
(left), 2. MARCH. 

(The “left” in parenthesis means that we can sub- 
stitute it for mght and have the movement executed in 
a similar manner to the left.) 

At the command 


ayes march, No. 1 inthe © 
Ta KX ix x Qfave front rank faces to 


_ 78 2 ay the right in march- 
“3X & [=] ing and marks time; 
#+™ [4] Nos. 2, 3, and 4 of 
Seal the front rank turn 


45 degrees to the 
right (right oblique), place themselves abreast (on the 
same line) of No. 1 and mark time. 

Now it is difficult quickly to understand the move- 
ments of the rear rank. 


Give them a ]6t of study & os a: m7 Kis 
and don’t go on until | i —_— He 
you are certain that you me C4 cin way tt 1s 
understand. DX uN zi aN 

No. 3 moves straight 7D” ea 
to the front. | SS We - 

No. 2 follows No. 3. iw 


No. 1 follows No. 2. 
When they (Nos. 3, 2 and 1) arrive in rear of their 


SCHOOL OF THE SQUAD 69 


file leaders, (Nos. 3, 2 and 1, front rank) they face to 
the right in marching and mark time. 

No. 4 of the rear rank moves straight to the front 
four paces, and places himself abreast of No. 3, rear 
rank. 

When No. 4, front rank, and No. 4, rear rank, are 
on the line, (and the remainder of the squad must 
glance toward them to see when that is true), the whole 
squad moves forward without further command. 

Note that we have said that No. 1 front rank marks 
' time. We see that he becomes, temporarily, an im- 
movable pivot for his squad. We, therefore, call him 
a fixed pivot. 

Had the command been squad left, instead of squad 
right, No. 4 would have been the fixed pivot instead of 
No. 1. 

Being in line, to turn and halt: 1. Squad right 
(left), 2. MARCH, 3. Squad, 4. HALT. 

The turn is executed as prescribed in the preceding 
case except that all men, on arriving on the new line, 
mark time until the command halt is given, when all 
halt. 

Whenever the third command (i.e., squad) is given 
it means that the command halt is to follow. This is 
a caution to the squad to prepare to halt. The com- 
mand halt should be given as No. 4 arrives on the line. 


70 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


SECOND MovEMENT 


SQUAD RIGHT ABOUT 


Being in line, to turn about and march: 1. Squad 


right (left) about, 2. MARCH. 


I 


noe S32 S E88 


what 


what 
we want 


Sd SP 


At the command march, the front rank twice exe- 
cutes Squad right, initiating (starting) the second 
Squad right when No. 4 has arrived on the line. That 
much is very simple. 

The rear rank has a harder task. Let us have the 
front and rear rank execute the movement separately: 


Bees apa) 2h 
SN 
Front = = 2 : 
Ronk Bl x] KI bd i 
v Y 
: ‘ 
eS a tare, Ae 3 
hag nds Reet cr erie § eee 3) oie es Sorte are }——---- ben 


Pet OO SO SEE HOOCEESEEOE EAP OBEDEOSISBARBADESOSMSIAGS 


The rear rank is to take its place on the dotted line 
a b. 


No. 3 rear rank moves straight to the front until in 


SCHOOL OF THE SQUAD 71 


prolongation of the line to be occupied by the rear rank. 

No. 2 follows No. 3. 

No. 1 follows No. 2. 

When No. 8 arrives on the line to be occupied by 
the rear rank he changes direction to the right; he 
moves in the new direction until in rear of No. 3, front 
rank, when Nos. 3, 2, and 1, rear rank, are in rear of 
Nos. 3, 2, and 1, front rank, (1.e., when they are in rear 
of their front rank men), they face to the right in 
marching and mark time. No. 4 marches on the left 
of No. 3 to his new position. As he arrives on the line, 
both ranks execute forward march without command. 
For the remainder of the squad to know when No. 4 
front and rear rank have arrived on the line, they 
glance to see. 


Tuirp MovEMENT 


RIGHT TURN 


Being in line: 1. Right (left) turn, 2. MARCH. 


/ XJ - ()---&3 [roe Bd salen ot ae | 
After 2 - BY 


+ - @-----” 


THIS IS THE WAY IT IS DONE 


At the command march, No. 1 front rank faces to 
the right in marching and takes the half step. Nos. 2, 


72 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


3, and 4 front rank right oblique (turn 45 degrees to 
the right) until opposite their places in line, then exe- 
cute a second right oblique and take the half step on 
arriving abreast of the pivot man. When No. 4 ar- 
rives on the line Nos. 1, 2, 8, and 4 take the full step 
without further command. (‘To know when No. 4. 
arrives on the line it is necessary to glance in his di- 
rection. ) 

The rear rank executes the movement in the same 
way and turns on the same ground as the front rank. 
The rear rank, therefore, moves forward at the com- 
mand march, or continues to move forward, if already 
marching, until it arrives at the place where the front 
turned, when it turns. 

Note that the squad turns on No. 1 front ranks but 
that he does not remain in his position even temporarily, 
as in squad right; he is, therefore, called the moving 
pivot. No. 4 is called the marching flank. 

Had the command been left turn, No. 4 would have 
been the moving pivot, and No. 1 the marching flank. 

Knowing the three above movements, we are pre- 
pared for the following: 

Being in line at a halt: 1. Take interval, 2. To 
the right (left), 3. MARCH, 4. Squad, 5. HALT. 


: u : = Aissernbled 


Ke 
| fh f an EP . 
BEING IN THIS FORMATION 


SCHOOL OF THE SQUAD 73 


At the command to the right (left), the rear rank 
men march backward four steps (15 inches each step) 
and halt. 

LIKE THIS 
Note that the ac- 


[+] tual distance from 
Rear rank 4. the front rank to the 
wo Cc . 


7 fol tata far 2 
4) SG plus 4x15 inches, 
KX x4 X 1e., 100 inches. 

fen eee 


At the command march, all face to the right and 
No. 1 front and rear rank step off. No. 2, front and 
rear rank, follow No. 1, front and rear rank, at a dis- 
tance of four paces. Likewise with the other numbers. 


ii 2] & 
Like this, when No. 1 front 
and rear rank have gained four 
paces distance. 
HY wskeR 
/ Pa ie ep 
At the command halt, given when No. 3 is three paces 
distant from No. 4, all halt and face to the front. 


3) O O O 
The squad looks like 4 = =a oe 
this when the move 4% /nrervals 
ment is completed. 
i x 


= JF 


~& 
Bl 


74 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


Being at intervals: 1. Assemble, to the right, 
(left), 2. MARCH. 

At the command march, No. 1 front rank stands — 
fast. No. 1 rear rank closes to 40 inches. ‘The other 
men face to the right, close by the shortest line, and 
face to the front. 


i: r ome 

/ Pea Be oie 4. 
poses 

Gf i fee ane 

KK KSS KS? es 
2 “bs 


Being in line at a halt: 1. Take distance, 2. 
MARCH, 3. Squad, 4. HALT. 

At the command march, No. 1 of the front rank 
moves straight to the front; Nos. 2, 3, and 4 of the 
front rank and Nos. 1, 2, 8, and 4 of the rear rank, in 
the order named, move straight to the front, each 
stepping off so as to follow the preceding man at four 
paces. The command halt is given when all have their 
distances. 

In case more than one squad is in line, each squad 
executes the movement as above. The guide of each 
rank of numbers is right. 


SCHOOL OF THE SQUAD 75 


f 


Ara 
on 


m7 


Ny 
— — — — — — — FY — —— — -82 1 


eM ut N 


© Eel eg 


~Nw wu 


Lh lreé 


Boe 


ee eee 


eels 


Af AtsTAaVICES 


oe ee 


ee ae 


Nw 


| 
an: 
The front rank men should walk straight to the front 
and their rear rank men should cover them accurately. 
Being at distances, to assemble the squad: 1. As- 
semble, 2. MARCH. 
No. 1 of the front rank stands fast; the other num- 
bers move forward to their proper places in line. 


76 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


THE OBLIQUE MARCH 


For the instruction of recruits, the squad being in 
column or correctly aligned, the instructor causes the 
squad to face half right (or half left), points out to 
the men their relative positions, and explains that these 
are to be maintained in the oblique march. 

1. Right (left) oblique, 2, MARCH. 

Each man steps off in a direction 45 degrees to the 
right of his original front. He preserves his relative 
position, keeping his shoulders parallel to those of the 
guide (the man on the right front of the line or 
column), and so regulates his steps that the ranks re- 
main parallel to their original front. 

At the command halt, the men halt faced to the 
front. 

To resume the original direction: 1. Forward, 2. 
MARCH. 


Raf Geis 
Bap LY Eye} Cay 
/ FF + 
raraveiwery 
bytset os 
4 2 F&F 4 


SCHOOL OF THE SQUAD ie 


The men half face to the left in marching and then 
move straight to the front. 

If at half step or mark time while obliquing, the 
oblique march is resumed by the commands: 1. Ob- 


lique, 2. MARCH. 


TO FOLLOW THE CORPORAL 


Being assembled or deployed, to march the squad 
without unnecessary commands, the corporal places 
himself in front of it and commands: FOLLOW ME. 

If in line or skirmish line, No. 2 of the front rank 
follows in the track of the corporal at about 3 paces; 
the other men conform to the movements of No. 2, 
guiding on him and maintaining their relative positions. 

If in column, the head of the column follows the cor- 


whentale 
Rae 


‘of Paces,” 


7 
4 


poral. 


Corporal 


Note that No. 4 rear rank takes the place of the cor- 
poral when the corporal is in front of the squad. This 
is a general rule. When any front rank man is absent 
his rear rank man steps up in the front rank. When 


78 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


the squad is following the corporal No. 4 rear rank re- 
mains blank (1.e., No. 8 does not step to the left and 
cover No. 4). : 


TO DEPLOY AS SKIRMISHERS 


Being in any formation, assembled: 1. As_ skir- 
mishers, 2. MARCH. 

The corporal places himself in front of the squad, if 
not already there. Moving at a run, the men. place 
themselves abreast of the corporal at half-pace intervals. - 
Nos. 1 and 2 on his right, Nos. 3 and 4 on his left, rear- 
rank men on the right of their file leaders, extra men 
on the left of No. 4; all then conform to the corporal’s 
gait. 

There is a rule of thumb that must be remembered. 
The rear-rank man is always on the right of his file 
leader. 

A common error is for beginners to execute the 
movement at a slow trot when a run is required. 

When the squad is acting alone, skirmish line is simi- 
larly formed on No. 2 of the front rank, who stands 
fast or continues the march, as the case may be; the 
corporal places himself in front of the squad when 
advancing and in rear when halted. 

When deployed as skirmishers, the men march at 
ease, pieces at the trail unless otherwise ordered. 

The corporal is the guide when in the line; otherwise 
No. 2 front rank is the guide. 

The normal interval between skirmishers is one-half 


SCHOOL OF THE SQUAD 79 
pace, resulting practically in one man per yard of front. 
The front of a squad thus deployed as skirmishers is 
about 10 paces. 


POctia NG. Lar *NO..32 Non? = Cpl. No.3 No.3 No. 4 
RR FR RR FR RR FR RR 
. SQUAD DEPLOYED ON CORPORAL 
og rary | 
wt ny bel i gh he 
aes fen _esetntled in Whe 


x ay 
ie Se 1 aie U4 


Ps ea l pate oS 
te | wid J | DY 
(IXKX¥ O NX & baal: a [Declared ira Mi 
/ / 2 2 Corporal 5 
re DI PA OS ei ee 


THIS IS THE WAY IT IS DONE 


The common error is to keep an interval of a very 
few inches when 15 inches are required. 


TO INCREASE OR DIMINISH INTERVALS 


If assembled, and it is desired to deploy at greater 
than the normal interval; or if deployed, and it is de- 
sired to increase or decrease the interval: 1. AS 


skirmishers, (so many) paces, 2. MARCH. 


80 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


Intervals are taken at the indicated number of paces. 
If already deployed, the men move by the flank or away 
from the guide. 

The above command is used but very little. 


THE ASSEMBLY 


Being deployed: 1. Assemble, 2. MARCH. 

The men move toward the corporal and form in their 
proper places. 

If the corporal continues to advance, the men move 
in double time, form, and follow him. 

The assembly while marching to the rear is not exe- 
cuted. 


Note. It will be better for the beginner to let the remainder 
of this chapter go for awhile. Your instructor will explain all of 
the following points in a way that will be easier for you than for 
you to try to work them out alone. They will come up in the 
month’s work and will be explained and shown as you go along. As 
you become more proficient we advise you, then, to take up the re- 
mainder of the chapter. : 


If standing: KNEEL. 

Half face to the right; carry the right toe about 1 
foot to the left rear of the left heel; kneel on the right 
knee, sitting as nearly as possible on the right heel;. left 
forearm across left thigh; piece remains in position of 
order arms, right hand grasping it above the lower hand. 

If standing or kneeling: LIE DOWN. 

Kneel, but with right knee against left heel; carry 
back the left foot and lie flat on the belly, inclining body 


SCHOOL OF THE SQUAD 81 


about 35 degrees to the right; piece horizontal, barrel 
up, muzzle off the ground and pointed to the front; 
elbows on the ground; left hand at the balance, right 
hand grasping the small of the stock opposite the neck. 
This is the position of order arms, lying down. 

If kneeling or lying down: RISE. 

If kneeling, stand up, faced to the front, on the 
ground marked by the left heel. 

If lying down, raise body on both knees; stand up, 
faced to the front, on the ground marked by the knees. 

If lying down: KNEEL. 

Raise the body on both knees; take the position of 
kneel. 

In double rank, the positions of kneeling and lying 
down are ordinarily used only for the better utilization 
of cover. 

When deployed as skirmishers, a sitting position may 
be taken in lieu of the position kneeling. 


LOADINGS AND FIRINGS 


The commands for loading and firing are the same 
whether standing, kneeling, or lying down. The fir- 
ings are always executed at a halt. 

When kneeling or lying down in double rank, the 
rear rank does not load, aim, or fire. 

The instruction in firing will be preceded by a com- 
mand for loading. 

Loadings are executed in line and skirmish line only. 

Pieces, having been ordered loaded, are kept loaded 


82 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


without command until the command unload, or inspec- 
- tion arms, fresh clips being inserted when the magazine 
is exhausted. 

The aiming point or target is carefully pointed out. 
This may be done before or after announcing the sight 
setting. Both are indicated before giving the command 
for firmg, but may be omitted when the target appears 
suddenly and is unmistakable; in such case battle sight 
is used if no sight setting is announced. 

The target or aiming point having been designated 
and the sight setting announced, such designation or 
announcement need not be repeated until a change of 
either or both is necessary. 

Troops are trained to continue their fire upon the 
aiming point or target designated, and at the sight 
setting announced, until a change is ordered. 

If the men are not already in the position of load, 
that position is taken at the announcement of the sight 
setting; if the announcement is omitted, the position is 
taken at the first command of firing. 

When deployed, the use of the sling as an aid to ac- 
curate firing is discretionary with each man. 


TO LOAD 


Being in line or skirmish line at halt: 1. With 
dummy (blank or ball) cartridges, 2. LOAD. 

At the command load each front-rank man or skir- 
misher faces half right and carries the right foot to the 
right, about 1 foot, to such position as will insure the 


SCHOOL OF THE SQUAD 83 


greatest firmness and steadiness of the body; raises, or 
lowers, the piece and drops it into the left hand at the 
balance, left thumb extended along the stock, muzzle at 
the height of the breast, and turns the cut-off up. With 
the right hand, he turns and draws the bolt back, takes 
a loaded clip and inserts the end in the clip slots, places 
the thumb on the powder space of the top cartridge, the 
fingers extending around the piece and tips resting on 
the magazine floor plate; forces the cartridges into the 
magazine by pressing down with the thumb; without 
removing the clip, thrusts the bolt home, turning down 
the handle; turns the safety lock to the “safe” and 
carries the hand to the small of the stock. ach rear 
rank man moves to the right front, takes a similar posi- 
tion opposite the interval to the right of his front rank 
man, muzzle of the piece extending beyond the front 
rank, and loads. 

A skirmish line may load while moving, the pieces 
being held as nearly as practicable in the position of 
load. 

If kneeling or sitting, the position of the piece is 
similar; if kneeling, the left forearm rests on the left 
thigh; if sitting the elbows are supported by the knees; 
if lying down, the left hand steadies and supports the 
piece at the balance, the toe of the butt resting on the 
ground, the muzzle off the ground. 


84. THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


STACK AND TAKE ARMS 


The subject of stack and take arms is less important 
than the rest of this chapter. It is difficult to be learned 
from a book. Your company commander will explain 
it to you. It is given here to serve as a reference. 

Being in line at a halt: STACK ARMS. 

Each even number of the front rank grasps his piece 
with the left hand at the upper band and rests the butt 
between his feet, barrel to the front, muzzle inclined 
slightly to the front and opposite the center of the in- 
terval on his right, the thumb and forefinger raising the 
stacking swivel; each even number of the rear rank 
then passes his piece, barrel to the rear, to his file leader, 
who grasps it between the bands with his right hand 
and throws the butt about 2 feet in advance of that of 
his own piece and opposite the right of the interval, the 
right hand slipping to the upper band, the thumb and 
forefinger raising the stacking swivel, which he engages 
with that of his own piece; each odd number of the front 
rank raises his piece with the right hand, carries it well 
forward, barrel to the front; the left hand, guiding the 
stacking swivel, engages the lower hook of the swivel of 
his own piece with the free hook of that of the even 
number of the rear rank; he then turns the barrel out- 
ward into the angle formed by the other two pieces and 
lowers the butt to the ground, to the epee of and against 
the toe of his right shoe. 


SCHOOL OF THE SQUAD 85 


The stacks made, the loose pieces are laid on them by 
the even numbers of the front rank. 

When each man has finished handling pieces, he takes 
the position of the soldier. i 

Being in line behind the stacks: TAKE ARMS. 

The loose pieces are returned by the even numbers of 
the front rank; each even number of the front rank 
grasps his own piece with the left hand, the piece of his 
rear-rank man with his right hand, grasping both be- 
tween the bands; each odd number of the front rank 
grasps his piece in the same way with the right hand, 
disengages it by raising the butt from the ground and 
then, turning the piece to the right, detaches it from the 
stack; each even number of the front rank disengages 
and detaches his piece by turning it to the left, and then 
passes the piece of his rear-rank man to him, and all 
resume the order. 

Should any squad have Nos. 2 and 3 blank files, No. 
1 rear rank takes the place of No. 2 rear rank in making 
and breaking the stack; the stacks made or broken, he 
resumes his post. 

Pieces not used in making the stack are termed loose 
pieces. 

Pieces are never stacked with the bayonet fixed. 


CHAPTER V 


SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY 


The company in line is formed in double rank with 
the men arranged, as far as practicable, according to 


_ height from right to left, the tallest on the right. 
The original division into squads is effected by the 


command: Count off. The squads, successively from 
the right, count off as in the School of the Squad, cor- 
porals placing themselves as No. 4 of the front rank. 

At the formation of the company the platoons or 
squads are numbered consecutively from right to left, 
and these designations do not change. 

For convenience in giving commands and for refer- 
ence, the designations, right, center, left, when in line, 
and leading, center, rear, when in column, are applied 
to platoons or squads. ‘These designations, right, cen- 
ter, left, when in line, and leading, center, rear, when 
in column, are applied to the actual right, left, center, 
head, or rear, in whatever direction the company may 
be facing. The center squad is the middle or right 
middle squad of the company. If there are an even 
number of squads in the company, for instance eight, 
the center squad would be the fourth. 

The designation “So-and-so’s” squad or platoon may 


also be used. 
86 


87 


SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY 


NivLav? @ 


‘UvUT 1OF UBIO ‘AuBd peep td 
-W09 9} UI URE A1dAd JO UOTZISOd 7 
qoaLtod oy} sMoYs yy =«‘yYdevasoyoyd ANAV] and 
oY} SB IUIBS ay} ATJOVXO ST SIT, LOYIC,./ i 


LY oyF “47077 


é 


soko ray 


FaIIND) & 
YIOVIT GLNOG FY 


NPIDISN A CB 


SYISOTD F714 AO 
SMTN! SYFHLO ! 


FLVAIA-/ CT 


‘zi = 5 x ws 5H we 


Fs 


Bcegistinken kee 


' 
‘ 
' 


SOY>U/\ OF 


. 
« 
‘ 


sooby Zz 
Ce) £3 BH svaso/D ayly 


88 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


During battle, these assignments are not changed; 
vacancies are filled by non-commissioned officers of the 
platoon, or by the nearest available officers or non-com- 
missioned officers arriving with reinforcing troons. 


CLOSE ORDER 


In column of squads, each rank preserves the align- 
ment toward the side of the guide. 

Men in the line of file closers do not execute the load- 
ings and firings. 


TO FORM THE COMPANY 


At the sounding of the assembly the first sergeant 
takes position 6 paces in front of where the center of 
the company is to be, faces it, draws saber, and com- 
mands: Fallin. 

The right guide of the company places himself, facing 
to the front, where the right of the company is to rest, 
and at such point that the center of the company will 
be 6 paces from and opposite the first sergeant; the 
squads form in their proper places on the left of the 
right guide, superintended by the other sergeants, who 
then take their posts. 

The first sergeant commands: Report. Remaining 
in position at.the order, the squad leaders, in succession 
from the right, salute and report: All present; or 
Private (s) absent. The first sergeant does not 
return the salutes of the squad leaders; he then com- 
mands: 1. Inspection, 2. ARMS, 3. Order, 4. 


SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY 89 


ARMS, faces about, salutes the captain, reports: SIT, 
all present or accounted for, or the names of the unau- 
thorized absentees, and, without command, takes his 
post. 

If the company cannot be formed by squads, the first 
sergeant commands: 1. Inspection, 2. ARMS, 3. 
Right shoulder, 4. ARMS, and calls the roll. Each 
man, as his name is called, answers here and executes 
order arms. ‘The sergeant then effects the division into 
squads and reports the company as prescribed above. 

The captain places himself 12 paces in front of the 
center of, and facing, the company in time to receive 
the report of the first sergeant, whose salute he returns, 
and then draws saber. 

The lieutenants take their posts when the first ser- 
geant has reported, and draw saber with the captain. 

Generally in camp the saber is not worn. The of- 
ficers and first sergeants carry pistols. The hand 
salute is rendered when so armed. 

In the School of the Squad we gave three movements 
that formed the basis of the squad drill. There are 
six movements in the School of the Company that 
should be thoroughly understood. When the beginner 
knows these he will have no difficulty with the remain- 
der of the close order. 


1st MOVEMENT ON THE FIXED PIVOT 
Being in line, to turn the company: 1. Company 
right (left), 2. MARCH, 3. Company, 4. HALT; or, 
3. Forward, 4. MARCH. 


THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


90 


‘qUOIF OY} 0} soovd AnoJ Surpprvur s1ojaq onbiyqo 
O} YURI III 9Y} LOF SI LOLIa UOWUWUOD OUT, “sey. 7eYA 
yivd oy} 0} Ivpnorpuediod st yUautaaout ay} pozaTdut09 


jou svy yory Auvdutod oy} Jo zed ay} yeyy 010K / 


CaLATANOO ATIVH LNYWAAOW ONIMOHS 


SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY 91 


At the second command the right-flank man in the 
front rank faces to the right in marching and marks 
time; the other front-rank men, oblique to the right, 
place themselves abreast of the pivot, and mark time; 
in the rear rank the third man from the right, followed 
in column by the second and first, moves straight to the 
front until in rear of his front-rank man, when all face 
to the right in marching and mark time; the remaining 
men of the rear rank move straight to the front 4 paces, 
oblique to the right, place themselves abreast of the 
third man, cover their file leaders, and mark time; the 
right guide steps back, takes post on the flank and 
marks time. 

The fourth command is given when the last man is 


1 pace in rear of the new line. 
The command Halt may be given at any time after 


the movement begins; only those halt who are in the 
new position. Each of the others halts upon arriving 
on the line, aligns himself to the right, and executes 
front without command. 

The difference between this movement and squad. 
right is slight. ‘The rear rank acts a little differently, 
and the company waits for the command to move for- 
ward. ‘The idea is exactly the same. 


92 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 
2D MOVEMENT ON THE MOVING PIVOT 


Being in line, to change direction: 1. Right (left) 
turn, 2. MARCH, 3. Forward, 4. MARCH. 

Executed as described in the School of the Squad, 
except that the men do not glance toward the marching 
flank and that all take the full step at the fourth com- 
mand. The right guide is the pivot of the front rank. 
Each rear-rank man obliques on the same ground as 


his file leader. 


nS i CAST OF eae 
ais, 3 = er ar a rae y. 
eee Ae he hf ie i 7 ye 

FipLCl:| | eae aren he oh ve os 
hey, 
EF oe tenes ae 
/ 

ROeeid Mataid sit atl aye 4 


THIRD MOVEMENT 


Being in line, to form column of squads and change 
direction: 1. Right (left) by squads, 2. MARCH. 

At the command march, the right squad marches 
forward; the remainder of the company executes squads 
right, column left, and follows the right squad. The 
right guide, when he has posted himself in front of the 
right squad, takes four short steps, then resumes the 
full steps; the right squad conforms. 

A common error is for the guide to forget to take the 
four short steps. 


SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY 93 


ii 


THTHtTTeY 


Keep dressed ac- 
curately on the side 
of the guide. (He 
is always on_ the 
side opposite from 
the) tile: ~ ‘closers: 
This*is a rule of 
thumb that should 
be memorized at 
once.) The guides 
In every squad 
should keep 40 
inches from _ the 
man in front. So 
many new men for- 
get about the 40 
inches. ‘They usu- 
ally take a little 
over 30. When the 
company is moved 
into line there is 
of course a Jam. 
Hold your head up. 
Don’t look down to 
the ground. You 
will be in this for- 
mation more than 
any other. ‘Try to 
keep the fcllowing 


94 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


cautions in mind: The leading men of the company 
should have four inches interval. Better to have too 
much than too little if mistakes are to be insisted upon. 
IXeep the pieces in the correct positions at right shoul- 
der and then have heads and rifles in a bee line. When 
the movement is completed the company will be in the 
formation shown in the drawing. 


FOURTH MOVEMENT ON THE MOVING PIVOT 


Being in column of squads, to change direction: 1. 
Column right (left), 2. MARCH. 

At the second command the front rank of the leading 
squad turns to the right on moving pivot as in the School 
of the Squad; the other ranks, without command, turn 
successively on the same ground and in a similar man- 


“1000000. 


Ss, 


as 


ner. 


It is a very common error for the pivot man to take 
too short a step and thereby cause a jam. Bear this in 
mind. Another very common error is for the flank man 
(or men) to take a very long step. This is caused by 
the pivot man’s forgetting to glance and see when the 
flank man arrives on the line, before he takes the full 
step. Another common error is to get out of column 


SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY 95 


while making this movement. Bear this in mind and 
walk straight to the turning point. 


THIS SHOWS THE COMPANY IN COLUMN OF SQUADS, 
CORRECT POSITION 


THIS SHOWS THE COMMON ERRORS 


96 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


Now we come to the two last movements. ‘They 
cause more trouble than any others. 


FIFTH MOVEMENT ON RIGHT (LEFT) INTO LINE 


Being in column of platoons or squads, to form line 
on right or left: 1. On right (left) into line, 2. 
MARCH, 3. Company, 4. HALT, 5. FRONT. 

(On right [left] into line, means turn in the direction 
that is on your right and get into line. You have to be 
in column before the movement is begun.) 

Let us first consider the company in column of squads. 


Betore 


“AH Het Bhs 


pa ae ee Se eee + 
After Piprieiiac pace ' 


At the captain’s command on right into line, the 
corporal of the leading squad commands right turn. 
The corporals of all the remaining squads, if halted, 
command forward, if marching they caution their 
squads to continue the march. At the captain’s com- 


SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY 97 


mand march, the leading squad turns to the right on a 
moving pivot. ‘The remaining squads march straight 
to the front. 

Each corporal commands right turn before arriving 
opposite the right of his squad’s place in line. When 
the front rank of his squad has arrived opposite that 
place he gives the command march. 

The command halt is given when the leading squad 
has advanced the desired distance in the new direction. 
Only the leading squad halts. The corporal then com- 
mands right dress. 

The remaining corporals before arrival on the line, 
command, squad, and add the command halt just be- 
fore the front rank reaches the line. ‘They, then, com- 
mand right dress. 

The captain then dresses the company and commands 
front. | 

If executed in double time the leading squad marches 
in double time until halted. 

Now let us consider the company in columns of pla- 
toons. See illustration on next page. 

At the captain’s command on right into line, the 
leader of the first platoon commands right turn, the 
leaders of the rear platoons, if halted, command for- 
ward; if marching, they caution their platoons to con- 
tinue the march. ‘The first platoon executes the right 
turn at the captain’s command march. Having com- 
pleted the turn the platoon commander gives the com- 


mand, forward, MARCH. 


ROG 


2°*% Platoorr 


98 


SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY 99 


The remaining platoon commanders give right turn, 
MARCH, when opposite their places, and the command, 
forward, MARCH, when the turn has been completed. 

When the leading platoon has advanced the desired 
distance the captain gives the command, company, 
HALT. At the command company, the leading pla- 
toon leader gives the command, platoon. His platoon 
only halts at the captain’s command, halt. The pla- 
toon leader then gives the command, right dress, and 
takes his post in the file closers. The remaining pla- 
toons are successively halted and dressed by their leader. 


FRONT INTO LINE 


Being in column of platoons or squads, to form line 
to the front: 1. Right (left) front into -line, 2. 
MARCH, 3. Company, 4. HALT, 5. FRONT. 

(Right [left] front into line means move to the right 
front and get into line. It is necessary to be in column 
to begin this movement. ) 

Let us first consider the company in column of squads. 
At the captain’s command, right front into line, the 
corporal of the leading squad, if halted, commands for- 
ward; if marching, he cautions his squad, continue the 
march. ‘The corporals of the remaining squads com- 
_ mand right oblique. At the command march, the 
leading squad moves forward. ‘The remaining squads 
oblique as indicated. The command halt is given when 
the leading squad has advanced the desired distance; 
its corporal then commands left dress. 


100 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


The remaining corporals command forward, 
MARCH, when opposite their places in line. They 
halt and dress their squads on the line established by the 
leading squad. 

When the company is in column of platoons the 
movement is executed in the same manner and by the 
same commands except the word platoon is substituted 
for squad. 


(del DZ 
ple Bape 
mean Before 
& 
Z jt ie Oey eA | 
eed ae ge! ETS 
Nghe 4 ee y= v 
pee 4-~“ 7 ee rc ? 
x Sn 9 7 54a a —— ~ 
Y 7 or 4Y pie y we 
Me 4 Sane bad 
‘oN re ses ae < 
ip Ty ee ea pe 
\ Ue \ v 
{ l ‘hie a ! ' 
{ t ) feet 4 { | 
Ab gfe tela | i. 
" | I H i ti. | | | 
{ H | l t_-4 | l Pema tae 
Jet ae | fi 3 
| 1 | orp Canad ae a ec 
| ! | wot 
| T + y 
l | icoohunt 
halatelgn (pray an 
Tel7lelsl4zisi2i 1 BEE BENS 
Fo i Oe aN 


Being in line, to form column of platoons, or the re- 
verse: 1. Platoons right (left), 2. MARCH, 3. 
Company, 4. HALT; or, 3. Forward, 4. MARCH. 


Before 


SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY 101 


Executed by each platoon as described for the com- 

pany. 
_ Before forming line the captain sees that the guides 
on the flank toward which the movement is to be exe- 
cuted are covering. ‘This is effected by previously an- 
nouncing the guide to that flank. 

The two common errors are: 1. First, the pivot man 
takes a short step instead of marking time. Second, 
(being in line), the pivot men of the platoons forget 
that they are the pivots and therefore do not execute the 
command when ordered. 

The following illustration shows the side view of a 
platoon. Note the common errors: No. 1 rear rank is 
closed up to about twenty inches. He is looking down 


102 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


at the heels of his front rank file (man). Rifles are im- 
properly held. Some men in the rear rank have more 
than forty inches distance from their front rank men. 

Being in line, to form column of squads, or the re- 
verse; or, being in line of platoons, to form column of 
platoons, or the reverse: 1. Squads right (left), 2 
MARCH; or, 1. Squads right (left), 2. MARCH, 3. 
Company, 4. HALT. 

Executed by each squad as described in the School of 
the Squad. 


— Eo 


€-----) 


If the company or platoons be formed in line toward 
the side of the file closers they dart through the column 
and take posts in rear of the company at the second 
command. If the column of squads be formed from 
line, the file closers take posts on the pivot flank, abreast 
of and 4 inches from the nearest flank. 

Being in column of platoons, to change direction: 1. 
Column right (left), 2. MARCH. 

At the first command the leader of the leading nlaicon 
commands: Right turn. At the command march the 
leading platoon turns to the right on moving pivot; its 
leader commands: Forward, 2. MARCH, on com- 
pletion of the turn. Rear platoons march squarely up 
to the turning point of the leading platoon and turn at 


SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY 103 


the command of their leaders. When each platoon has 
completed its turn, the leader commands forward, 


MARCH. 


Before 
ee re 
' ‘ ‘ 
1 \ 
J | 
1 ' 

v v 
! ' 
y a 


Saas wd eee 
tee 
ky we ey epee’) 

Being in column of squads, to form line of platoons 
or the reverse: 1. Platoons, column right (left), 2 
MARCH. 

xecuted by each platoon as described for the com- 
pany. 

Being in line, to form column of squads and change 


directions: 1. Squads left (right), column right 
(left), 2. MARCH. 


pate Et 


EST 
| 


The left squad initiates (begins) the column right as 
soon as it has completed the squad left. 

Being in line, to form line of platoons: 1. Squads 
left (right), platoons, column left (right), 2. 


Sree 


SNOOLVId AO ANIT 


o-. 


SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY 105 


MARCH; or, 1. Platoons, right (left) by squads, 2. 
MARCH. 


Executed by each platoon as described for the com- 
pany in the preceding paragraph. 


FACING OR MARCHING TO THE REAR 


Being in line, line of platoons, or in column of 
platoons or squads, to face or march to the rear: I. 
Squads right (left) about, 2. MARCH; or, 1. Squads 
right (left) about, 2. MARCH, 3. Company, 4. 
HALT. 

Executed by each squad as described in the School of 
the Squad. 

If the company is in line of platoons, or in column of 
squads, the file closers turn about toward the column, 
and take their posts; if in line, each darts through the 
nearest interval between squads. 

To march to the rear for a few paces: 1. About, 2. 
FACE, 3. Forward, 4. MARCH. 

If in line, the guides place themselves in the rear rank, 
now in front rank; the file closers, on facing front, 
maintain their relative positions. No other movement 
is executed until the line is faced to the original front. 

Being in column of squads to form column of 
platoons, or being in line of platoons, to form the com- 
pany in line: 1. Platoons, right (left) front into 
line, 2. MARCH, 3. Company, 4. HALT, 5. FRONT. 

Executed by each platoon as described for the com- 
pany. If forming column of platoons, platoon leaders 


1066 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


verify the alignment before taking their posts; the 
captain commands front when the alignments have been 
verified. | 
When front into line is executed in double time the 
commands for halting and aligning are omitted and 
the guide is toward the side of the first unit in line. 


AT EASE AND ROUTE STEP 

The column of squads is the habitual cclumn of route, 
but route step and at ease are applicable to any march- 
ing formation. 

To march at route step: 1. Route step, 2. 
MARCH. Sabers are carried at will or in the scab- 
bard; the men carry their pieces at will, keeping the 
muzzles elevated; they are not required to preserve 
silence, nor to keep the step. The ranks cover and 
preserve their distance. If halted from route step, the 
men stand at rest. 

To march at ease: 1. At ease, 2. MARCH. 

The company marches as in route step, except that 
silence is preserved when halted, the men remain at ease. 

Marching at route step or at ease: 1. Company, 2. 
ATTENTION. 

At the command attention the pieces are brought to 
the right shoulder and the cadenced step in quick time 
is resumed. 

FOR GUIDES 

A guide is a noncommissioned officer or a private 

upon whom the company regulates its march. 


SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY 107 


It is difficult for an inexperienced man to learn, with 
little practice, the duties and the correct positions of a 
guide. Remember the rule of thumb, The guide and 
the file closers are on the opposite flanks when the com- 
pany is in column of squads. In squads right about it 
would be ridiculous for the file closers to move from one 
flank to another. Guides are permitted and supposed 
to look around to see if they are in their proper places; 
most new men are timid about this. 

The following general rules and examples will help 
you: 

The guide of a company or platoon in line is right, 
unless otherwise announced. 

The guide of a company or platoon in column of 
squads is toward the side of the guide, who places himself 
on the side of the company away from the file closers. 

The guide of a deployed line (a skirmish line) is 
always center unless otherwise announced. 


EXAMPLES 


The company is assumed to be in line. 

In executing: 

1. Squads right. The guides go to the left flank. 

2. Right by squads. ‘The guides go to the left flank. 

3. Squads left. The guides go to the right flank. 

4. Left by squads. The guides go to the right flank. 

If the company is in column of squads and the com- 
mand is either squads right or left about, the guides 
simply remember to remain on the flank opposite from 


108 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


the file closers. It is very easy to see that a world of 
confusion would. be caused by the file closers attempting 
to move to the opposite flank during squads right or 
left about. If the guides are in doubt look to see where 
the file closers are and then apply the rule of thumb: 
File closers and guides are always on opposite flanks. 


TO DIMINISH THE FRONT OF A COLUMN OF SQUADS 


Being in column of squads: 1. Right (left) by 
twos, 2. MARCH. | 

At the command march all files except the two right 
files of the leading squad execute “in Place Halt”; the 
two left files of the leading squads oblique to the right 
when disengaged and follow the right files at the shortest 
practicable distance. The remaining squads follow 
successively in like manner. 


Being in column of squads or twos:  farararcn 
1. Right (left) by file, 2. MARCH. ‘Vir >" 
At the command march, all files exe- uN ev BN ON 
cute “In Place Halt,” except the right "7 2 Cet 
file of the leading two or squad. The Ae RY RT RA 
left file or files of the leading two or Shara 


<[x} 

‘\ ‘N 
\ 
\ 

‘ 

\ 


\ 


squad oblique successively to the right 
when disengaged and each follows the 
file on its right at the shortest practi- 
cable distance. The remaining twos or 
squads follow successively in like man- N N 


[r}<{4} 


E 


ner. ’ RIGHT BY TWOS 


SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY 109 


ra 
tu 
A ote | 


<A <! 


cn 
xt [a 
Cu ws 


eu wd 


KAY 
be ol 
vr RA 


a Cs oe 
SFU KRA 


\ra 


RA 
we 
. 
an 
cy 
RA 
<M ta 


© 
‘“s 


= 


‘ 
K 
an 


e 

Bb) 

‘\ \ 
* mS 
N 

Pe me 

\ 
‘. 
\ 


‘N 


HOBO ADO 


Being in column of files or twos, to form 
column of squads; or, being in column of 
files, to form column of twos: 1. Squads 
(twos), right (left) front into line, 2. 
MARCH. 

At the command march, the leading 
file or files halt and come to order arms. 
The remainder of the squad, or twos, 
obliques to the right and halts on line with 
the leading file or files. The remaining 
squads or twos close up and successively 
form in rear of the first in like manner. 

The movement described in this para- 
graph will be ordered right or left, so as 


RIGHT By FILE to restore the files to their normal relative 
positions in column of twos or in column of squads. 
The movements prescribed in the three preceding 
paragraphs are difficult of execution at attention and 
have no value as disciplinary exercises. 
Marching by twos or files can not be executed without 


Executing. two 
left oaks ite nf 


firme. 


Fal ee re] 
a Saeriore 
K7 KIKI 
HN Scy cy# 
rc cars 
LiF v5 Le) 
KAK7 
EZ 4eucye 
Pes | peak ea, 
ie Ji 
K RTKRT 
Sh tN re 
Woltslta Executing sguads 
OO Abe ere Scie iste 
en SIETE 
NN BRAN 
ie 423 4 


110 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


serious delay and waste of road space. Every reason- 
able precaution will be taken to obviate the necessity for 
these formations. 

The remainder of chapter on close order drill, School 
of the Company, is in general for those above the grade 
of private, therefore, unless we are perfectly clear in 
what we have had so far, let us not go too deeply 
into these special features until we have more eaperi- 
ence. 

The captain is responsible for the theoretical and 
practical instruction of his officers and noncommissioned 
officers, not only in the duties of their respective grades, 
but in those of the next higher grades. 

If the left squad contains less than six men, it is either 
increased to that number by transfers from other squads 
or is broken up and its members assigned to other squads 
and posted in the line of file closers. ‘These squad 
organizations are maintained, by transfers if necessary, 
until the company becomes so reduced in numbers as to 
necessitate a new division into squads. No squad will 
contain less than six men. 

The company is further divided into two, three, or 
four platoons, each consisting of not less than two nor 
more than four squads. In garrison or ceremonies the 
strength of platoons may exceed four squads. 

Platoons are assigned to the lieutenants and noncom- 
missioned officers, in order of rank, as follows: 1, right; 
2, left; 3, center (right center) ; 4, left center. 

The noncommissioned officers next in rank are as- 


SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY 111 


signed as guides, one to each platoon. If sergeants still 
remain, they are assigned to platoons as additional 
guides. When the platoon is deployed, its guide, or 
guides, accompany the platoon leader. 

The first sergeant is never assigned as a guide. 
When not commanding a platoon, he is posted as a file 
closer opposite the third file from the outer flank of the 
first platoon; and when the company is deployed he 
accompanies the captain. 

Musicians, when required to play, are at the head of 
the column. When the company is deployed, they ac- 
company the captain. 

Guides and enlisted men in the line of file closers 
execute the manual of arms during the drill unless 
specially excused, when they remain at the order. Dur- 
ing ceremonies they execute all movements. 

In taking intervals and distances, unless otherwise 
directed, the right and left guides, at the first command, 
place themselves in the line of file closers, and, with 
them, take a distance of 4 paces from the rear rank. 
In taking intervals, at the command march, the file 
closers face to the flank and each steps off with the file 
nearest him. In assembling the guides and file closers 
resume their positions in line. 

Being in line at a halt, the captain directs the first 
sergeant, dismiss the company. ‘The officers fall out; 
the first sergeant places himself faced to the front, 3 
paces to the front and 2 paces from the nearest flank of 
the company, salutes, faces toward opposite flank of 


112 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


the company, and commands: 1. Inspection, 2. 
ARMS, 3. Port, 4. ARMS, 5. DISMISSED. 

The alignments are executed as prescribed in the 
School of the Squad, the guide being established instead 
of the flank file. ‘The rear-rank man of the flank file 
keeps his head and eyes to the front and covers his file 
leader. 

At each alignment the captain places himself in pro- 
longation of the line, 2 paces from and facing the flank 
toward which the dress is made, verifies the alignment, 
and commands: FRONT. 

Platoon leaders take a like position when required to 
verify alignments. 


EXTENDED ORDER DRILLS 


As soon as your progress in close order is sufficiently 
advanced, you will be given extended order drill, which 
will teach you the formations used in battle, and how a 
firing line is controlled. ‘They are executed at ease. 

We should know the meaning of the two following 
terms: Base and Deploy. 

- Base. The element on which a movement is reg- 
ulated. In company drill it is usually the right or left; 
leading, rear, or center squad. 

Deploy. 'To extend the front. The company de- 
ploys when it executes as skirmishers. 

There are really only two conditions that we must 
consider in this drill. ‘The movements are very easy to 


1138 


‘SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY 


Spenhe pr spenbhse c spenee ¢ spenrbks ¢ 
uo Yb UOOfL/ P45 UOYb/4 pu 2 Uoapb)/y 1S} 


114 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


understand, but they require a lot of practice to prevent 
confusion. 

Let us take the first case of the company being in line 
at a halt. It is desired to form a skirmish line to the 
front. 1. As skirmishers, guide right (left or cen- 
ter), 2. MARCH. 

At the preparatory command (ie., aS skirmishers, 
guide right) all the corporals, except the corporal of 
the first squad, give the command, by the left flank, the 
corporal of the first squad gives the command, as 
skirmishers. 

At the command march, all squads, except the first 
squad, move to the left, and when they have their proper 
intervals they are deployed to the right (left) and on 
the line of the base squad by the corporals giving the 
commands: As skirmishers, 2. MARCH. ‘The cor- 
poral of the first squad deploys his squad as soon as he 
has sufficient room (interval). 

That ’s all there is to the first movement with some 
slight modifications. 

Of course if the command had been as skirmishers, 
guide left, the base squad would have been the left or 
fourteenth squad instead of the first squad, for when 
we speak of the right or left of a company, in the deploy- 
ments, the company being in line, we mean the right or 
left squads of the company. 

Another modification: Suppose the command had 
been as skirmishers, guide center. In that case the 
base squad would be the center or seventh squad. ‘The 


SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY 115 


base (seventh) squad deploys without moving to the 
right or left. There is only one thing for the first six 
squads to do and that is to move to the right. There is 
only one thing for the last seven squads to do and that 
is to move to the left. 

We have considered the company so far to be at a 
halt; suppose that it had been moving forward. The 
corporal of the base squad deploys his squad as soon as 
he has sufficient interval, and then continues straight to 
the front until the command: 1. Company, 2. HALT, 
is given by the captain. The other corporals move their 
squads to the left front (or right front), by command- 
ing their squads, Follow me. ‘They conduct their 
squads on the shortest and easiest route to their places 
on the line and then deploy their squads as they arrive 
on the general line. 


6 ERS ea Defore 


| \ oe 
HoooooooDoOoOoOoOoOoOoOoOoODoo0oODoOooOoOoOoOoooD 
igieeda. 


The corporals should remember that they are not to 
step out from their squads to conduct them to their 
proper places until the captain has given the command 
march. 


116 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


The corporals often fail to take sufficient intervals 
thus causing a jam. 

The company being at a halt, the corporals should 
remember to give by the right or left flank instead of 
right or left face. 


SECOND CASE 


Now suppose the company is in column of squads at 
ahalt. It is desired to form a skirmish line to the front: 
1. As skirmishers, guide right (left), 2. MARCH. 

At the command march, the corporal of the first, or 
leading squad, deploys his squad without advancing. 
All of the other corporals move to the left front and 
deploy their squads on the line formed by the first squad. 
At the preparatory command the corporals command, 
follow me, and at the command MARCH, they step in 
front of their squads and conduct them to their places. 

Had the command been as skirmishers, guide left, 
of course all except the leading squad would have moved 
to the right. For when the company is in column of 
squads, as skirmishers, guide right means that the first 
or leading squad is to be the right of the skirmish line. 
If left, instead of right is given that simply means that 
the leading or base squad is to be the left of the skirmish 
line. 

Now we come to the last variation. It is difficult for 
the new man. The command as skirmishers, guide 
center, the company being in column of squads, simply 
means that the center squad is to be the base squad. 


SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY 117 


All other squads are to regulate their movements on the 
base squad as in all other cases. 

This is a peculiar case and for it the authorities have 
adopted a rule of thumb. Al squads in front of the 
_ base squad go to the right, those in rear to the left. 
That ’s all there is to it. But that must be remembered. 
Corporals will conduct their squads to their proper 
places by the shortest and easiest routes. 

We will use a platoon of four squads to illustrate the 


idea. 
id 
Before 133 
CA Bey 
o ae | 5 
} — = se 
Ele Xe le ale 
vy » 
pb ooonoDodbooooeMeoOooooodooooodGooD After 
ne 3 
De a J 
Ke ee, 
AES a 


Note that the leading corporal turns his squad well 
to the right rear and then to the left. 

We have assumed the company to be at a halt; sup- 
pose it is moving forward. In that case the base squad 
simply continues moving forward after it has deployed 
until the captain gives the command halt. The other 
corporals conduct their squads by the shortest routes to 
their proper places and deploy them on the general line. 


118 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


When the company, while moving, is deployed, it is 
a common error for squads in rear of the base squad to 


— Before 


meee ys 
SS Sy/ 
rae 
hae Ay Ae 
(ese a ofa 
—— et 
Tere ae 
' 4 
Daas > “< me 
55 3£3¢€3 C3 103 if: 7 Y ae 
t v/v a ie 
y \ > 
9N000D 00000000 b0nDbDooODOvoOOoOOOOOUOOD 
dt ter 
co Before 
a ee ry 
i 
STs a 
; Baie! ole ee 
Rot | Nee baw 
iA \ oe 
/ 6 PS ev et [rears Hes AS TS 
/ et eee Sr pare ie tere Ges eS 
obo ooooDooDooODOOoDoOo 


oDoouocodcgooooo 
After 


take long and fast steps and come up on the line of the 
base squad. ‘This should not be done unless the com- 


mand double time is given. 


EXTENDED ORDER 


RULES FOR DEPLOYMENTS 


The command guide right (left or center) indicates 
the base squad for the deployment; if in line it designates 


SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY 119 


the actual right (left or center) squad; if in column the 
command guide right (left) designates the leading 
squad, and the command guide center designates the 
center squad. After the deployment is completed, the 
guide is center without command, unless otherwise 
ordered. 

At the preparatory command for forming skirmish 
line, from either column of squads or line, each squad 
leader (except the leader of the base squad, when his 
squad does not advance) cautions his squad, follow me 
or by the right (left) flank, as the case may be; at the 
command march, he steps in front of his squad and leads 
it to its place in line. 

Having given the command for forming skirmish line, 
the captain, if necessary, indicates to the corporal of the 
base squad the point on which the squad is to march; 
the corporal habitually looks to the captain for such 
directions. 

The base squad is deployed as. soon as it has suf- 
ficient interval. ‘The other squads are deployed as they 
arrive on the general line; each corporal halts in his place 
in line and commands or signals, aS skirmishers; the 
squad deploys and halts abreast of him. 

If tactical considerations demand it, the squad is de- 
ployed before arriving on the line. 

Deployed. lines preserve a general alignment toward 
the guide. Wihithin their respective fronts, individuals 
or units march so as best to secure or to facilitate the 


1200 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL © 


advance but the general and orderly progress of the 
whole is paramount. 

On halting, a deployed line faces to the front (di- 
rection of the enemy) in all cases and takes advantage 
of cover, the men lying down if necessary. 

The company in line or column of squads may be 
deployed in an oblique direction by the same commands. . 
The captain points out the desired direction; the cor- 
poral of the base squad moves in the direction indicated ; 
the other corporals conform. 

To form skirmish line to the flank or rear the line or 
the column of squads is turned by squads to the flank 
or rear and then deployed as described. 

The intervals between men are increased or decreased 
as described in the School of the Squad, adding to the 
preparatory command, guide right (left or center), if 
necessary. 


THE ASSEMBLY 


The captain takes his post in front of, or designates, 
the element on which the company is to assemble and 
commands: 1. Assemble, 2. MARCH. 

If in skirmish line the men move promptly toward the 
designated point and the company is re-formed in line. 
If assembled by platoons, these are conducted to the de- 
signated point by platoon leaders, and the company is 
reformed in line. 

Platoons may be assembled by the command: 1. 


Platoons, assemble, 2. MARCH. 


SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY 121 


Executed by each platoon as described for the com- 
pany. 

One or more platoons may be assembled by the com- 
mand: 1. Such platoon(s), assemble, 2. MARCH. 

Iixecuted by the designated platoon or platoons as 
described for the company. 

Wherever it is necessary in campaign to deploy troops 
there is often so much noise and confusion that it is im- 
possible for the officers and noncommissioned officers to 
make themselves heard. Signals must be used instead 
of verbal commands. 


WHISTLE SIGNALS 


There are only two kinds of whistle signals; a short 
blast and a long blast. A short blast means pay at- 
tention, or look out for a signal or command. 

A long blast means stop firing for a minute (suspend 
firing). 


THE ADVANCE 


The advance of a company into an engagement 
(whether for attack or defense) is conducted in close 
order, preferably column of squads, until the probability 
of encountering hostile fire makes it advisable to deploy. 
After deployment, and before opening fire, the advance 
of the company may be continued in skirmish line or 
other suitable formations, depending upon circum- 
stances. The advance may often be facilitated, or bet- 
ter advantage taken of cover, or losses reduced by the 


122 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


employment of the platoon or squad columns or by the 
use of a succession of thin lines. 'The selection of the 
method to be used is made by the captain or major, the 
choice depending upon conditions arising during the 
progress of the advance. If the deployment is found 
to be premature, it will generally be best to assemble the 
company and proceed in close order. 

Patrols are used to provide the necessary security 
against surprise. 

Being in skirmish line: 1. Platoon columns, 2. 
MARCH. 

The platoon leaders move forward through the center 
of their respective platoons; men to the right of the 
platoon leader march to the left and follow him in file; 
those to the left march in like manner to the right; each 
platoon leader thus conducts the march of his platoon 
in double column of files; platoon guides follow in the 


Cs ta eres c3 i Ew oe a SG i ae I BS aie eG itu bates Gate 
tla i 
i | 
||| lI | 
[| | [| | 
a I | | 
go oO 
O)\0 OO 
0)0 O,0 
OVO Oo 
de O10 
0,0 0/0 
O)}0 0/0 

& x 


SHOWING HOW PLATOON COLUMNS ARE FORMED 


Corporal . 
SQUAD COLUMN 


123 


124 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


en ry 
o 3 2. c3 
\ ‘ e 
ch a 7 c?, 
jes’ Poy \ ia) \ le nN 
ued i aN 
oe \ (ny ‘ Before (pe ne \ 
a 
pdud 4 jis \ jes \ fim \ 
oP et ¢ /sen \ Pigtsiee GN Mie FR 
er a TS 8 ay et: Fe AON Piste 
/ \ ar UN / -~ \ \ 
j ‘ors ¥ / / AS cat / / jee Ft ; 3 es 
f poet wk fod fea \ \ / i, ak ek Fatt kt, CONN 
/ i) 9. Ge ee Anata C3, 3 eG Me eg So ey sd bay YY 
Ct ae \ \ POP ee a ee RO eS Ne / Ee on wh es 
foe alee Poy sik : Pa aay Poof jaye eN 
ro (es ak ae ae Na hd rae fF SEN Pe es 
f hg A cA te et \ fa, i \ Sar 8 , | Me FT ae RMT) ee THe han 
ul ‘ Z ’ / : 
HodoooeooovooooooooDRoOoOooooOeobo0o000000 
Affer 


SQUAD COLUMNS 


rear of their respective platoons to insure prompt and 
orderly execution of the advance. 

Being in skirmish line: 1. Squad columns, 2. 
MARCH. See preceding page. 

Each squad leader moves to the front; the members 
of each squad oblique toward and follow their squad 
leader in single file at easy marching distances. 

Platoon columns are profitably used where the ground 
is so difficult or cover is so limited as to make it desir- 
able to take advantage of the few favorable routes; no 
two platoons should march within the area of burst of 
a single shrapnel (ordinarily about 20 yards wide). 
Squad columns are of value principally in facilitating 
the advance over rough or brush-grown ground; they 
afford no material advantage in securing cover. 

To deploy platoon or ‘squad columns: 1. AS 
skirmishers, 2. MARCH. 

Skirmishers move to the right or left front and suc- 
cessively place themselves in their original positions on 
the line. 


. r . 
ghd bay ses ta 
Oo eo ON 
’ 
iy i} 3 a Befo: eS 4 leaey \ 
poe, us, \ oe 4 pus tav \ 
sé \.\ / . 
a ze | \ / en .F3 4h 
/ / 
a af thee ua \ y) a ; a ts \ be Ne 
Dilpend CL tee Woes \ yin fer Ma Oe oe SA 8 
’ , he “Ay \ * . ne pe AVN NV \ 
es 2 tir ers \ acs ‘ Ni sagen rei yo SN \ 
OT 1 Ff ped CANNY \ FLL CERI ERAN SSN 
RET ee eee a \ ‘\ FATAL IT Oe eS Rete 
Se Pd ee ne 1 apd ras ‘ 
- rie, re hes t4\\ “oS ‘ge ee tt pee ta\ \ \ \ 
Fe FEIT OEU om ERY Ke oNe. NS edz Pah jeri ey wh ure 8s 
Ie el a Bares ewes x Bs Ser Aa Be OSs Ft ual RA SEN Ne 
wie. 8 eat a tet 18 \ + PY LY hoe, COP ee Se eS 
Ca ee ed Oe pea Ree S (a , ey \ 
rs a ee! ALA ON Ot tte TAY CON SS 
aa g / wor, eee ‘ ’ + eK 
é ‘ ‘ \ x % \ F i f-"% / , ' ' \ \ 
/ ee a | \ y- ct ee ara \ 
é / ie , ht i 3 \ aN ‘ ax Ps / MAA Bas Oey | ‘oO! ok os Ok oh 
<a Se Wee Le 2 eo” pee , ee oe Se yt St ee Sel net ee ee ee eae va ee eee ee 
gHonoaddbgadooooooodbobKgaooodooooooooood 


Q 
eter 3 
PLATOON COLUMNS 


Being in platoon or squad columns: 1. Assemble, 
2. MARCH. 

The platoon or squad leaders signal assemble. The 
men of each platoon or squad, as the case may be, ad- 
vance and, moving to the right and left, take their 
proper places in line, each unit assembling’ on the lead- 
ing element of the column and reforming in line. The 
platoon or squad leaders conduct their units toward the 
element or point indicated by the captain, and to their 
places in line; the company is reformed in line. 


oO 2 Before 2 - im 


‘Oo | 0, (OD 
Io! ID, ;O. iO\ 
a) /o\ 10 ID 
ig! ¥Oy rat toy 
lg! lo ja! po, 
| 0 \ fe | oO \ | 0 \ 
lt Spudd lands, Squid 7 | 
7 2ndsquad qua 42904 
Miler 1a | 277] 30" 1 4% |---<f — -- <0 ) 
Assembled on «3 «03 <3 


the first or right squad 


126 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


5 =) Before 5 = 
30 20) 
| 
Veer VooY 
; Ey eC) Ces 
Pele ~ eis 
Pee \ lv! 
uf Pigioon\ = len Petar 


\ 
Miter (ate et eee ) 
w 4 


Being in skirmish line, to advance by a succession of 
thin lines: 1. (Such numbers), forward, 2. MARCH. 

The captain points out in advance the selected posi- 
tion in front of the line occupied. ‘The designated 
number of each squad moves to the front; the line thus 
formed preserves the original intervals as nearly as 
practicable; when this line has advanced a suitable dis- 
tance (generally from 100 to 250 yards, depending upon 
the terrain and the character of the hostile fire), a second 
is sent forward by similar commands, and so on at 
irregular distances until the whole line has advanced. 
Upon arriving at the indicated position, the first line is 
halted. Successive lines, upon arriving, halt on line 
with the first and the men take their proper places in the 
skirmish line. 

Ordinarily each line is made up of one man per squad 
and the men of a squad are sent forward in order from 
right to left as deployed. The first line is led by the 
platoon leader of the right platoon, the second by the 
eulde of the right platoon, and so on in order from right 
to left. 


SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY 127 


The advance is conducted in quick time unless con- 
ditions demand a faster gait. 

The company having arrived at the indicated position, 
a further advance by the same means may be advisable. 

The advance in a succession of thin lines is used to 
cross a wide stretch swept, or likely to be swept, by ar- 
tillery fire or heavy, long-range rifle fire which cannot 
profitably be returned. Its purpose is the building up 
of a strong skirmish line preparatory to engaging in a 
fire fight. ‘This method of advancing results in serious 
(though temporary) loss of control over the company. 
Its advantage lies in the fact that it offers a less definite 
target, hence is less likely to draw fire. 

The above are suggestions. Other and better forma- 
tions may be devised to fit particular cases. The best 
formation is the one which advances the line farthest 
with the least loss of men, time, and control. 


FIELD EXERCISES 


These exercises, as well as combat exercises, are for 
instruction in duties incident to campaign. To receive 
the maximum benefit from them you must know the as- 
sumed situation of each exercise. 


THE FIRE ATTACK 
The principles governing the advance of the firing 
line in attack are considered in the chapters on Attack 


and Defense. 
When it becomes impracticable for the company to 


128 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


advance as a whole by ordinary means, it advances by 
rushes. 

Being in skirmish line: 1. By platoon (two 
platoons, squad, four men, etc.) from the right 
(left), 2. RUSH. 

The platoon leader on the indicated flank carefully 
arranges the details for a prompt and vigorous execution 
of the rush and puts it into effect as soon as practicable. 
If necessary, he designates the leader for the indicated 
fraction. When about to rush, he causes the men of 
the fraction to cease firing and to hold themselves flat, 
but in readiness to spring forward instantly. The 
leader of the rush (at the signal of the platoon leader, 
if the latter be not the leader of the rush) commands: 
Follow me, and running at top speed, leads the fraction 
to the new line, where he halts it and causes it to open 
fire. ‘The leader of the rush selects the new line if it 
has not been previously designated. 

The first fraction having established itself on the new 
line, the next like fraction is sent forward by its platoon 
leader, without further command of the captain, and so 
on, successively, until the entire company is on the line 
established by the first rush. 

If more than one platoon is to join in one rush the 
Junior platoon leader conforms to the action of the 
senior. 

A part of the line having advanced, the captain may 
increase or decrease the size of the fractions to complete 
the movement. 


SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY 129 


When the company forms a part of the firing line, 
the rush of the company as a whole is conducted by the 
captain, as described for a platoon in the preceding 
paragraph. ‘The captain leads the rush; platoon leaders 
lead their respective platoons, platoon guides follow the 
line to insure prompt and orderly execution of the 
advance. 

When the foregoing method of rushing, by running, 
becomes impracticable, any method of advance that 
brings the attack closer to the enemy, such as crawling, 
should be employed. 


CHAPTER VI 


FIRE SUPERIORITY. 


Do not study this chapter until you begin your ex- 
tended order drills. 

If the authors of this text were requested to select for 
you the most important of all information that you will 
receive during the first month at a training camp, they 
would advise you to take home that contained in this 
chapter. If you have learned fully so much you will 
have done well. If you have failed to comprehend as 
much as this, you will have returned to your homes lack- 
ing in important knowledge. 

If you are on the battle-field and propose to crush 
the other side (defeat the enemy), you have got to do 
one thing: you have got to make your rifle fire better 
than his, and you have got to keep it better. 

The proposition is this: ‘The enemy is on the defense. 
He is in a number-one, first-class trench. It is con- 
structed with steel, concrete, and sandbags. It has all 
the improvements that science can devise. Your busi- 
ness is to attack and crush the enemy. How can you 
advance over exposed ground against such a position? 
The man behind all those modern improvements has got 
to stick his head up more or less when he fires. If the 


volume and rate and accuracy of your fire is greater thar: 
130 


FIRE SUPERIORITY 131 


his, he will grow timid about the matter. His fire will 
become less effective. ‘That is to say, he cannot have 
fire superiority. When your side has fire superiority, 
it not only can advance upon such a position but it can 
do so without ruinous losses, and with hope of success. 

To obtain this fire superiority it is necessary to pro- 
duce a heavier volume of accurate fire than your op- 
ponent can produce. We can get a proper conception 
of the ideas involved by imagining two firemen in a fight 
armed with hose. One has a larger hose and a greater 
water pressure than the other. All else being equal, we 
can foresee clearly who will be the victor and who will 
be defeated. ‘The more water one throws into the other’s 
face, the less accurate and effective will the other’s aim 
become. ‘This is equally true with bullets. Put a man 
on the target range, where no danger whatsoever is in- 
volved, and he may fire with a nice degree of accuracy. 
Put him on the battle-field with a great number of bul- 
lets whizzing around his head, and he must be a trained 
veteran to fire with the same accuracy. ‘This is true 
simply because we have been made that way. 

The volume and accuracy of fire depend upon several 
considerations: (a) Of primary importance is the num- 
ber of rifles employed. Let us imagine a battle-line one 
mile long. It is obvious that we cannot have one man 
firing behind another. We don’t want to destroy our 
ownmen. ‘They must, therefore, be placed side by side. 
Each man must have sufficient room to operate his rifle. 
Experience tells us that we must not have more than 


132 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


one man per yard. We thus see that our battle-line - 
of a mile can only have about eighteen hundred rifles. 
(b) The rate of fire affects its volume; an excessive 
rate reduces its accuracy. If you were hunting tigers, 
you can easily imagine where one well-aimed and well- 
timed shot could be of more use to you and more harm 
to the tiger than haif a dozen shots fired too rapidly. 
(c) If the target is large, is clear (can be easily seen), 
and is but a short distance from you, your fire, for rea- 
sons that do not require explanations, can be more 
rapid. Greater density increases the effect. Suppose . 
a hundred deer were grazing on a hill; you would be 
more likely to kill some deer than if only a half dozen 
were there. (d) The position of the target influences 
the effect of fire. Suppose that ten men were lined up 
in a row against a wall and that it is your business to 
kill the lot with a rifle. If you are in front of them, ten 
shots at least will be required. But it is possible for you 
to take a position in prolongation of the line (on its 
flank) and kill the entire number with one bullet. (This 
also illustrates the extreme vulnerability of flanks.) 
What are the important steps that must be taken if 
you are going to get this fire superiority? Ist, Fire Di- 
rection. 2d, Fire Control. 3d, Fire Discipline. 


FIRE DIRECTION 


A company that cannot start firing or stop firing, that 
cannot fire faster or slower, that cannot distribute 
equally its: fire over an opposing target, that cannot 


FIRE SUPERIORITY 133 


switch its fire from one place to another and make bull’s- 
eyes, would be as unsuccessful in battle to-day as Har- 
vard’s football team would be, without practice, in its 
final game with Yale. The team work in no depart- 
ment of athletics is as necessary or vital as that of a 
military force, the teamwork of a military machine. 
The first is a sport, a limited time being involved. ‘The 
second is a question of life and death to the nation. 

It requires a nice and cool judgment, under actual 
conditions of war, to point out and distribute properly 
the target to the different groups, to find the exact range, 
and give all these instructions (directions) that will be 
necessary to produce an effective fire upon the enemy. 
Who is responsible for giving these instructions (fire 
direction), and exactly what are all the conditions that 
must be fulfilled in order that each individual on the 
firing line may know exactly where and how to fire? 

The captain (company commander) is responsible for 
all. In the military world there is no such thing as 
shifting responsibilities. 'The commander assumes full 
responsibility, whether things go right or wrong. He 
must handle his job through his subordinates (platoon 
leaders). 1st, He points out the target to his platoon 
leaders. 2d, He assigns a part of the target to each 
platoon, in such a manner that the entire target (ob- 
jective) will be covered (fired upon). 3d, He deter- 
mines and gives the men the distance to the objective 
(range). 4th, He indicates the kind of fire to be em- 
ployed (that is, whether each man will fire as he pleases, 


134 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


fire five shots and then stop, et cetera). 5th, He indi- 
cates when the company is to commence firing. 6th, 
Thereafter the captain observes what effect his com- 
pany’s fire is producing, and corrects flagrant (material) 
error. He prevents the exhaustion of his ammunition 
and distributes such extra ammunition as may be re- 
ceived from the rear. 


FIRE CONTROL 


We have just described what the captain directs. 
Now we must put his directions (orders) into effect. 
This is done through his platoon leaders, assisted by the 
platoon guides and the corporals. 1st, The platoon 
leaders point out and describe their part of the objective 
(target) to the corporals. 2d, They assign a particular 
part of the objective to each corporal with the view of 
covering equally with the fire the entire objective. 34d, 
They announce the range (distance to the objective) to 
their platoons. 4th, If any part of the line cannot see 
the objective, the platoon leaders must make the changes 
so that it can see, or so that its fire will be effective. 
5th, They order their platoons to open fire at the proper 
time. Thereafter they observe the target and make any 
necessary changes to keep the fire effective, i.e., fire 
fast or slow, according to the necessity, and are on the 
alert for any commands or signals from the captain. 

The platoon guides do one thing only: they watch 
the firing line and check every breach of fire discipline. 
(See “Fire Discipline,” below.) 


FIRE SUPERIORITY 135 


The corporals have four distinct duties. Ist, They 
transmit the commands and signals to their squads 
when necessary. 2d, They observe the conduct of their 
squads and abate excitement. 3d, They do all in their 
power to enforce discipline. 4th, They participate in 
the firing. 

The best troops in the world are those who submit 
longest to Fire Control. Loss of it robs success of its 
greatest results. 


FIRE DISCIPLINE 


Now we come to the individual private on the firing 
line. All of the above measures for efficiency will come 
to but little unless the man with the gun can understand 
and do what he is directed to do. ‘This training is called 
Fire Discipline. 

Fire Discipline implies, besides a habit of obedience, 
a control of the rifle by the soldier (the result of train- 
ing), which will enable him in action to make hits in- 
stead of misses. It embraces: Ist, Taking advantage 
of the ground. 2d, Care in setting the sight and de- 
livery of fire. 38d, Constant attention to the orders of 
the leaders, and careful observation of the enemy. 4th, 
An increase of fire when the target is favorable, and a 
cessation of fire when the enemy disappears. 5th, 
Economy of ammunition. 

Fire Discipline implies that, in a firing line where the 
leaders have been killed, each man retains his presence 
of mind and directs effective fire upon the proper target. 


CHAPTER VII 


THE SERVICE OF SECURITY 


“Security” has the same meaning in the military 
world as elsewhere. We properly think of the security 
of our persons, our property, our families in connection 
with the term. In the military world the family, or 
community, being so much larger, the word “security” 
acquires additional dignity. 

A husband and father provides for the protection of 
his family whether at home or abroad. So does the 
military commander for his command, whether it is an 
army or a squad; whether it is in camp, on the march, 
in battle, advancing upon or retreating from the enemy. 
The end desired is the same in all cases. A study of all 
the measures adopted by the successful generals in his- 
tory shows that the means are not very different. 

A body of troops in camp is protected (made secure) 
by the use of groups placed between the enemy and the 
camp. We were told by a bee expert in Arizona that 
a limited number of bees remained in the vicinity of the 
hive. ‘They were quick to observe and resist (the two 
great duties of an outpost) any intruder. 


Suppose that you are in a part of the jungles of 
136 


THE SERVICE OF SECURITY 137 


Borneo where wild Mohammedan tribes still exist, that 
you have had a strenuous day’s march, and it is time for 
you to halt and camp for the night. If you are a 
thoughtful and experienced hunter you will pitch your 
camp where its protection will be least difficult. A 
few wild men may severely punish you for a lack of 
judgment in the matter. ‘They may probably spring 
from a weak and unexpected quarter when the occasion 
is least favorable for you. And unless the members of 
your camp know that you have exercised wise discretion, 
and that there are proper measures for their security, 
they will be unable to obtain the needed repose for the 
following day’s work. From this we can see the im- 
portant business (function) of an outpost. 

As a father would interpose himself between his wife 
and children and an attacking bulldog, so would a mili- 
tary commander provide a similar protection for his 
camp. We see from this one of the big duties of an 
outpost commander, i.e., especial attention should be de- 
voted to the direction from which the enemy (bulldog) 
is coming or is thought to be coming, and a probably 
less degree of attention to other points. 

Consider yourself a member of General Sherman’s 
army during its march from the North on Atlanta. 
You are to camp for the night on a very open piece of 
ground. You do not know where the enemy is, but you 
believe that he is somewhere south of you. The troops 
are tired. They have had a long, hard march. Let 
us suppose it is your duty to provide the security of the 


138 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


main body for the night. General Sherman has given 
you a certain number of men for this purpose. Just 
how would you go about it? 

Regardless of other considerations, it is. imperative 
that your own main force be not surprised or caught 
off guard by any contingency, however exceptional. 
To secure this immunity, it is necessary to send men or 
groups of men in the direction of the probable advance 
of the enemy, and to arrange these men or groups of 
men so that they can be of assistance to each other. This 
we call forming an outpost. 

It may be possible to have a line of protection extend- 
ing around the entire camp. It must be extended and 
arranged so as to keep the enemy so far away from our 
main body that he cannot observe our numbers or our 
position. ‘The enemy must not be permitted to ap- 
proach close enough to the main body to annoy or sur- 
prise it. Experience shows that all of. this is best ac- 
complished by placing: 1st, some groups or line of 
groups farthest from our main body and closest to the 
enemy in order to observe, to report the movements of 
the enemy, and, when necessary, to make a temporary re- 
sistance; 2d, a line of resistance (“supporting groups’) 
called “supports” upon which the first line can retire 
before being swamped by superior numbers; 3d, large 
groups, or line of groups (“line of reserves”), so lo- 
cated that they may go to the assistance of the second 
line in case of necessity. Such arrangements may be 
illustrated by the following diagram. 


a Pyles Seon” ‘ 


THE SERVICE OF SECURITY 139 
PLATE SHOWING ™ MAIN IDEAS INVOLVED IN SECURITY 


Danger zone 


Qanger zone arvinid ¢ Danger zone 
—_-—_—=-— — — 
Cavalry sg by smal Sa Cavalry 
-7ccvP! Pups ~ 
-~ Of o> &} 
a “Nia 
at. od 
Axor > 
a qt! a aie 
a cS 
JE ee qacerce Relying Par LON 
— 
74 : saw oN a, 
f° se a4 ON 
oO 
bet oegtten 9 By al 
mm Ke “2> - 
~ fe aN - 
i S2 a LO 
Note that distances from ~<S eos /f 15 most impor- 
the line of observation to here a tant to note that 
'the main body increase as oie ar the groups are placed 
the groups increase 17 sizé a 7 accoraing to the condl- 
The reserves are the largest MAIN a HONS ANA CUCUITSTAIICES 
‘groups The groups on the ge att of the particular. case 
ihe of observation are rhe a Dont follow any blind rules 
smallest BODY Your yuagment trust tell you 
: when %0 plate rs group Frere and 
not to place that group rere fave 
as few mer on such duty as prac 
hicable 
If a forest, or 
Ifa swamp, steep hills here, 
a large boaly 0 very small par- 
water here, very tes will afford 
small groups will the necessary 
attord the neces- security 


sary security 


Assume that we want to afford security for 
our main body from. any especially dangerous 
sector such as ABC Our ‘cavalry ss ir7 front 
of our first line and in touch with the enemy 
The. danger zone represents the direction from 
which the enemy 1s expected. 


This plan must be modified according to the particular 
ease. Let us suppose that we are camping by a large 
body of water, or that we are surrounded by mountains. 


140 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


We can easily imagine where we could change the above 
general plan so as to give adequate protection and at 
the same time lessen the number of men detailed for 
security. We must never forget that men are generally 
tired when they arrive in camp, and that we should make 
their work as light as circumstances permit. It requires 
a nice judgment to choose the correct number for se- 
curity. 

We should know the names of these groups. Far- 
thest away is the line that sees, and reports what it sees, 
but can offer only a limited resistance. This is called 
the “line of observation” or the “line of outguards.”’ 
In rear of the line of outguards we have larger groups 
placed at greater distances. ‘These are called “sup- 
ports.” This is the line that fights. This is the line 
that makes extensive preparations for fighting (or re- 
sisting). It is called the “line of supports” or the “line 
of resistance.” We have one farther and last line of 
groups which is still larger and occupies still greater dis- 
tances than the two we have just discussed. This is the 
safety valve and is called the “reserve,” or the “line of re- 
serves.” ‘This is the line that gives a sound factor of 
safety. It will only be called upon in cases of emer- 
gency and may therefore generally enjoy a consider- 
able degree of repose. But it and the line of supports 
combined must have sufficient strength to delay the 
enemy, in case of a general attack, long enough for our 
main body to form for battle. 

Let us look at the line of outguards for further im- 


THE SERVICE OF SECURITY 141 


portant considerations and distinctions. ‘The enemy’s 
movements and operations should ordinarily be ex- 
pected where there are for him least difficulties. Large 
(dangerous) bodies of troops find trouble in marshes, 
thick forests, steep mountainous country. They avoid 
these obstacles as much as possible, selecting open coun- 
try, solid soil, strong bridges, and good roads. Here is 
where large and strong groups in opposition are neces- 
sary. Small and unimportant groups (or no groups 
at all) should be placed where the enemy’s advance is 
exceptionally difficult. Finally, there will be places 
between these last two extremes that require just an 
average amount of attention, that is to say, require 
groups of medium strength. 

The groups that are largest and are used at the im- 
portant places where danger is most expected, are called 
“Pickets.” (These consist of from two squads of eight 
men each to eight squads.) The least important groups 
are called “Cossack Posts.” (These consist of four 
men, usually a noncommissioned officer and three pri- 
vates.) The groups of average importance are called 
“Sentry Squads.” (These consist of eight men, a cor- 
poral and seven privates. ) 

Having discussed in broad terms the security of 
troops in camp, we are prepared to consider their se- 
curity while either advancing upon or retreating from 
the enemy. In either case groups are placed between 
our main body and the actual or supposed position of 
the hostile troops. When we are advancing upon an 


eee 


142 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


enemy our advanced groups constitute what we term the 
“advance guard.” If we are retreating from the enemy, 
our rear groups compose the “rear guard.” 

The main general ideas of an advance guard are illus- 
trated by the husband who takes his wife and family to 
his house after an evening’s absence. ‘The house is dark 
and without occupants. The wife and children are ap- 
prehensive of danger. ‘The husband goes first, turns 
on the light, and searches for any indications of an en- 


-emy. He looks, if desirable, in the closets and under 
_ the beds. If there is any one that may harm his family 
it is his duty to find out and dispose of him. 


In the advance guard we have exactly the same gen- © 
eral scheme as with outposts. Far advanced to the 
front (and often to the sides or flanks) we have small 
groups (called, when considered collectively, the “ad- 
vance party”) whose business it is to inform us of the 
presence of the enemy. Next we have a large group 
(“support”) to assist these small and rather helpless 
ones in advance in case of difficulty. And last we have 
a still larger group (“reserve”) that may be called upon 
in great emergencies. | 

We should fully understand that all these groups are 
out to accomplish several ends, but their one great and 
ultimate object should be to push on ahead of the main 
body so that it may be secure and its march uninter- 
rupted. ‘To accomplish this it is desirable to get all 
possible information about the enemy; it is also desir- 


THE SERVICE OF SECURITY 143 


able to keep him from getting any information about 
your own troops. | 

The ideas are nearly the same with rear guards. 
Note this important difference: if, in an advance upon 
the enemy, your advance guard should suddenly be fired 
upon, your main body would (temporarily) halt. If, 
in a retreat, your rear guard is halted by the enemy’s 
fire, your main body would normally be marching far- 
ther from it. In the first case assistance is near at hand. 
In the second it is withdrawing. ‘The rear guard in a 
retreat should therefore be a little larger than in an 
advance. It must be able to extricate itself from any 
situation however difficult or it loses its usefulness. Its 
commander should have a cool, level head. ‘To delay 
the enemy and thus assist the main body to escape is his 
mission. For him to remain too long in a good position 
might endanger not only his safety but that of the main 
body as well. 


CHAPTER VIII 


ATTACK AND DEFENSE 


The European War has demonstrated more clearly 
than ever before two points in attack and defense. 
First, no people, or group of people, can claim a monop- 
oly on bravery. They all move forward and give up 
their lives with the same utter abandon. Courage being 
equal, the advantage goes to him in the attack who pos- 
sesses superior leaders, greater training, and_ better 
equipment. Second, a man’s training and courage, his 
clear eye and steady nerve, his soul’s blood and iron, 
constitute a better defense than steel and concrete. 

A soldier has little business attacking or defending 
anything in this day unless he is an athlete, unless he is » 
skilled in the technique of manceuver, unless he is a good 
shot, unless he knows the value of many features of the 
terrain (which means the nature of the country—its 
hills, rivers, mountains, depressions, etc.—considered 
from a military point of view), unless he is disciplined 
to a splendid degree, and unless his training has im- 
bued him with an irresistible desire to push forward, to 
get at his opponent. Assuming, at least, as much as 
this, we are prepared to consider the subject of the at- 
tack (the offensive). 


To have your troops superior in number, condition, 
144 


ATTACK AND DEFENSE 145 


training, equipment, and morale to that of your enemy; 
to be at the right place, at the right time, and there to 
deliver a smashing, terrific blow—this is the greatest 
principle of the attack. And history shows that victory 
goes more often to him who attacks. 

Initiative in war is no less valuable than in business 
life. Become at once imbued with the desire to put 
“the other fellow” on the defensive. ‘That makes him 
somewhat dependent upon your own actions. ‘That 
gives you opportunities to fool him that he does not so 
fully enjoy. Your commander can elect to attack any — 
point of the defensive line. Your dead and wounded— 
always a demoralizing element—are left behind. Your 
target is stationary. Your side is closing in. The en- 
emy is straining every nerve to fire faster and more ef- 
fectively, and still your side is closmg in. There is the 
thrill of motion. 

To attack, you will usually require a greater number 
of troops than the defense. Why so? Because you will 
be more exposed. You will have to move forward, how- 
ever dangerous the ground. Your enemy, for his pro- 
tection, will be certain to utilize and improve every ad- 
vantage of cover. Your losses will be greater. You 
should have a greater number of reserves to fill the de- 
pleted ranks. If the defensive can maintain a better 
(superior) fire, that is to say, a fire that kills and wounds 
a greater number than the opposing fire (this we call 
fire superiority), he will stop the advance of the attack- 
ing force unless that force is so superior in numbers that 


146 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


it can send forward reinforcements after reinforcements 
as an ocean sends shoreward its series of waves. 

Suppose that you were in command of a group of men 
and that you were ordered to attack. Just what prin- 
cipal points should you weigh? First, you should avail 
yourself of every opportunity to obtain all information 
of military value, such as the enemy’s strength, his po- 
sition, and intentions. For this you would have to send 
out groups of reconnoitering patrols exceptionally 
skilled in woodcraft, or trained to gather information. 
As soon as such information as is available is reported 
to you, you should at once begin the consideration of 
all the important elements that affect your problem. 
You must not lose sight of what you were sent out to 
do (your mission). Consider how this and that fact 
bear upon your course of action (estimate the situation). 
For instance: the enemy’s force is reported to be greatly 
inferior to your own. He is out of supplies. He is 
greatly fatigued with forced marches. His morale is 
shattered on account of recent and frequent reverses. 
His camp is disorganized. It is poorly guarded. Cer- 
tain roads are in fine condition. Others are very poor. 
Your troops are in splendid shape and excellent spirits. 
They believe tuat they can crush the enemy and want to 
attack. As you easily see, all such points have great 
significance in sizing up the case (estimating the situa- 
tion). 

Having estimated the situation, you should investi- 
gate and consider all possible courses of attack that are 


ATTACK AND DEFENSE 147 
open to you. Don't ask any advice from any one. Se- 
lect the course that appears to offer the greatest chance 
of success. Make up your mind what you are going to 
do (come to a decision). 

Having come to a decision, stick to it, right or wrong. 
Your next and final thing to do is to put your decision 
into action. ‘To do that, give your subordinates the in- 
formation they should possess; tell them what you are 
going to do and how you are going to do it; ie., issue 
your orders. 

A study of the orders of successful generals in history 
teaches us that we will be greatly aided in issuing them, 
if we will observe a system. We understand an order 
more easily and quickly if it conforms to some plan with 
which we are familiar. 

In. order to give your group an opportunity to act 
with a greater degree of teamwork, and intelligence in 
case of an emergency, it is necessary to give it data (in- 
formation) concerning the enemy. Your men should 
know where there are friendly troops. Now tell them 
what you are going to do (your plan), whether it be to 
attack, retire, or assume the defensive. And then or- 
der the execution of that plan by assigning to each 
group its task. Next tell (direct) what is to be done 
with the wagons (trains), and last, state where you may 
be found at any time in case of need or where messages 
may be sent to you. 

Having issued the order, let us now observe the prog- 
ress of the attack. You are probably three or four thou- 


148 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


sand yards from the enemy. His position 1s invisible. 
His artillery has opened fire. Your artillery is reply- 
ing. ‘The troops must advance cautiously over exposed 
ground. ‘They are not firing. ‘They are not deployed 
for action (in battle line). ‘They are waiting to get 
within as short a distance of the enemy’s line as possible, 
for their ammunition is limited; and after troops are 
actually launched in the attack, control over them, for 
ordinary purposes, is practically lost. The farther from 
the enemy the attack is launched, the longer the ex- 
posure to their fire and the greater the number of casu- 
alties, so the leaders of the different groups are taking 
advantage of all the accidents of the ground, of all cover 
in advancing. ‘They are using one formation here, an- 
other there, with a view to minimizing the losses and 
reaching an advantageous position as soon as possible 
where they can open an effective fire on the enemy. 

Now the enemy’s fire is severe. Casualties are be- 
coming heavy. ‘The men are growing restless. It is 
necessary to return the fire. Fire superiority should 
be gained at once. Don’t move forward until you gain 
it. If difficult to gain, use every means at your dis- 
posal. When you have it, keep it. Part of your men 
can advance when your side has fire superiority. The 
remainder of the firing line should fire faster to main- 
tain that superiority. If you lose fire superiority, re- 
gain it. If necessary, troops from the rear will gen- 
erally be sent forward. 

Now you are approaching the point where the charge 


ATTACK AND DEFENSE 149 


is to be made. Bayonets are fixed; not all at one time, 
for that would affect the advantage that you possess with 
your fire. Groups that have been held back in support 
are advanced. ‘These are to be used at decisive mo- 
ments. They are held well in hand. The firing line 
is lost in noise and confusion. Not so the supports; 
control is exercised over them. If they are not used in 
the attack they can be used to great advantage to com- 
plete the discomfort of the enemy after the clash 
(shock). 

There is at last, if the enemy remains in his position, 
the clash. Bayonet against bayonet, man against man, 
nerve against nerve. <Apply the great principle of at- 
tack and decide for yourself who the victor will be. If 
successful, then organize your men and prepare for the 
pursuit or for the return (counter attack) of the enemy. 

Now you are to handle groups on the defense. You 


- must bear in mind that there are two kinds of defense: 


first, where you do nothing but defend (passive de- 
fense) ; second, where you defend, but temporarily, with 
the idea of attacking the enemy as soon as a favorable 
opportunity arises (active defense). Let us assume 
that you have been ordered by superior authority to 
locate and prepare a definite position to check the ad- 
vance of an enemy. Just what main points should you 
bear in mind? Suppose you have found an ideal posi- 
tion; what conditions should it fulfil? You should be 
able to see the enemy long before he arrives at your 
position. Intervening objects and trees would make 


150 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


that impossible. You should be hidden from his view. 
The ends of your lines (your flanks) should rest, if pos- 
sible, on ground easy to defend; for instance, a high 
mountain, a large body of water, or an impassable 
swamp. A few acres of ground will not hold tens of 
thousands of men. ‘Therefore the extent of the ground 
must be suitable for the size of your group (force or 
command). It would be of great advantage to have 
such cover that one group (for instance, a support) 
could move from this position to that without danger of 
being fired upon or observed. A wise general has plans 
for any contingency. He is either going to win or he 1s 
not going to win. If he loses, he should have a means 
of escape (retreat). In selecting his position he should 
place it where the enemy must attack or give up his 
mission. Verdun had to be attacked before the ad- 
vance on Paris from the east was practicable. 

In defense there is a generous allowance of advan- 
tages. Usually you have time to select and prepare 
your position. By preparing a position we mean, you 
can dig trenches, destroy intervening objects that ob- 
struct the view of what you should see, construct ob- 
stacles that will embarrass the enemy in his advance, 
estimate (or determine) distances to important places. 
You have opportunities for collecting ammunition, ar- 
ranging wires for communication, establishing stations 
for the wounded. ‘Troops in motion are easier to see. 
You are not called upon for as much physical strain as 
the attacking troops. You are less fatigued. Your 


ATTACK AND DEFENSE 151 


machine guns are better concealed and the gunners know 
the ranges better than those of the attack. 

But it is most distressing to a man on the defense to 
see the enemy, regardless of everything he can do, ad- 
vance step by step. He begins to question within him- 
self the efficacy of his fire, which is to doubt his own 
ability. ‘The more he questions and worries, the less 
effective his aim becomes. His comrades are dead and 
wounded about him. ‘Their cries of distress are heard 
above the noise and confusion of battle. He becomes 
less methodical and deliberate in his actions. His shoot- 
ing becomes high and wild. ‘This becomes generally 
true. ‘The attacking force gains fire superiority. 

Suppose that it is actually your business to construct 
a defensive position. Just how will you assign the 
tasks? What are the important things to be done at 
first, and what, if time is pressing, may with least hard- 
~ ship be omitted? You would first cut down trees, blow 
up buildings, destroy crops that prevented you from 
seeing in any direction of danger. Next you should 
provide protection (concealment and cover), so that 
there will be as few casualties as possible. Then do 
what is in your power to make it most difficult for the 
enemy to arrive at your position; i.e., construct some 
barbwire fences (entanglements) that he will be unable 
to cross. Have your expert range finders determine 
and make notes of the distances to important points 
from which the enemy must advance. Next, dig ditches 
(trenches) so that your groups (supports or reserves) 


152 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


may pass from one point to another without danger. 
Now take steps to protect your most vital and vulner- 
able points, your flanks. Have them so strong, if prac- 
ticable, that the enemy will leave them alone. Assign 
to each group of men a section of the ground to defend. 
Having done these important things, then go about those 
things that will make you more comfortable in the 
trenches. 


CHAPTER IX 


GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF TARGET PRACTICE 


The most thrilling experience you will have at a train- 
ing camp will probably come when you step up to the 
firing line on the target range to fire your first shot. 
The great majority of new men grow pale, become 
nervous, lose their calm and poise, while they are on 
the firing line. ‘This is a fact, not a theory. And this 
loss of nerve is not confined to the new man. Any shot, 
however old and experienced, will tell you that he fully 
understands what we have just described. 

To become a good shot, we must solve a mental con- 
dition that corresponds in a way to that of beginners in 
golf. And we must master some details in technique. 

We should know something about the machine (rifle) 
we are to operate. We must know what the sights are 
and how to use them. We should know how those men 
most successful in the science and art of shooting hold 
the rifle under different conditions, how they adjust their 
slings, how they prepare (blacken) their sights and care 
for their rifles, what practice and preparation they take, 
and what bits of advice they have to offer. 

The primitive man had no means of accurately aiming 
his crude devices to throw stones. But in this day and 


age we have. ‘The modern rifle is one of the most per- 
153 


154 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


fect pieces of scientific machinery in the world. Very 
shortly after you arrive in camp your captain will ex- 
plain to you its sights and how they are adjusted. He 
has a sighting bar for that purpose. It will take you 
only a few minutes to grasp the subject when you have 
a rifle in your hands, and your instructor is pointing out 
and explaining just what you should know. On paper 
it seems to be hard. 

Now you will want to learn how to load your piece 
(rifle), work your bolt, and squeeze the trigger. Sim- 
ple as these points may seem, you will have something 
to learn after you have been at it ten years. Practise! 
practise! practise! Sit on your bunk and work your 
bolt ten thousand times before you go on the range. 
Get in the habit of doing it quickly. Learn to keep 
your piece at your shoulder while you pull the bolt back 
and push it home. Learn to make the fewest possible 
motions of your body in working it. To pull a bolt 
back and push it forward seems to be a simple thing 
to do. It is simple. But when you are actually firing 
at the target, experience tells you that you will have 
more trouble and a greater collection of hard luck stories 
to amuse your friends with than you ever imagined pos- 
sible, unless you have had plenty of practice. 

To squeeze a trigger seems to be a simple thing to do. 
It is simple. But after you have been squeezing trig- 
gers for twenty years you will have something more to 
learn about it. Ninety-five per cent. of the failures on 
the target range in the training camps come from not 


TARGET PRACTICE 155 


squeezing the trigger properly. You can’t learn how to 
squeeze it on paper. You have got to practise. Every 
time you work your bolt, squeeze your trigger. Get in 
some extra “squeezes.” You will find that your whole 
muscular and nervous system will need to be co- 
ordinated and harmonized. After you have been long 
about it you will find an extreme delicacy in its opera- 
tion. You will find that it requires a great deal more 
than a finger. All the muscles of your hand and arm 
will be required. We cannot overemphasize the impor- 
tance of squeezing your trigger. When you learn to do 
this without jumping (flinching), without moving an 
eyelash, you are making progress and are prepared for 
more advanced work. 

Why do you suppose we have “gallery practice,” Le., 
practice with a greatly reduced charge of powder? 
Simply to determine and correct your errors. We as- 
sume that you have normal sight and that you are in 
fair physical condition. Suppose that you make a per- 
fect score. What conditions must you fulfil? 1st, 
You must aim in exactly the same way every time. 2d, 
At the instant of firing your body must be in perfect 
repose. 3d, You must squeeze your trigger properly 
(without a jerk). 

You could not aim exactly the same way every time 
unless you understood your sights and unless you could 
see them plainly. You will be told to blacken them. 
Many forget and fail to do this. They do not fully 
realize that the sights are much easier to see when black- 


156 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL. 


ened, and that therefore the chances of hitting the bull’s- 
eye are much greater. ‘There’s no more luck in shoot- 
ing than there is in solving a problem in geometry, or in 
a game of billiards. It’s all practice, nerve, and sci- 
ence. 

Your body cannot be in repose at the instant you fire 
unless you have your sling properly adjusted, unless 
you are reasonably comfortable (not constrained), and 
unless you, temporarily, stop breathing. Your body 
must be, for an instant, a vise. Any trivial thing such 
as a puff of wind, a jerk of the trigger, or a noise near 
you, will ordinarily change your hold and throw you 
off the bull’s-eye. 

Suppose you are making a poor score. What is the 
trouble? In the first place don’t blame it on the rifle 
or the ammunition. Assume full responsibility your- 
self. You are the responsible party. Practise a great 
deal and see if you can locate the fault. If you cannot, 
your captain will assist you. 

When we go from gallery practice to the target 
range, where we fire the service rifle with the service 
charge, we find a great difference in the recoil of the 
rifle and in the sound. ‘The good Lord has made our 
muscles and nervous system to react automatically at 
danger or anything connected with it. That is prob- 
ably why we shudder and close our eyes when a door is 
slammed very near to us. But sound, unless we get too 
close, does not hurt any one, and we should steel our 


TARGET PRACTICE 157 


nerves to remember that fact when we are firing. We 
also know that there is going to be a certain amount of 
recoil of the rifle. But if you will hold your sling as 
you have been instructed, if you will provide yourself 
with proper elbow and shoulder padding, the authors of 
this text assure you that you will experience no pain or 
harm from the recoil. It is their judgment that if you 
are healthy and can see and will go on the range with 
your jaws set to fire with anything like your gallery 
practice coolness, and calmness, you will qualify. Your 
greatest stumbling block will be your rapid fire. This 
is where you fire a definite number of shots in a limited 
time. And this is where you will experience the extreme 
amount of nervousness. 

When you return from firing your first score at rapid 
fire, and have had time to think calmly over your ac- 
tions, you will probably realize that your nerves were 
pitched up in G and that you did a number of foolish 
things. You should realize that you are not an excep- 
tional man. Ninety-nine out of every hundred normal, 
virile men are more or less nervous when they first step 
up for rapid fire. Practice and will power are the cor- 
rectives. 

Let us suppose that you have ten shots to fire in two 
minutes. If you fire your ten shots in one minute it is 
plain that you return unused one minute given to you. 
This minute may have been of great use to you in get- 
ting closer to the bull’s-eye. If you fire at the rate of 


158 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


ten shots in three minutes, it is plain that when your 
two minutes shall have expired you have missed the op- 
portunity of firing four times at the bull’s-eye. 

Get one of your bunkies to go back of your tent and 
time you. ‘Then swap about and you hold the watch 
for him. Try to make of yourself a machine that fin- 
ishes the ten shots just before the time expires. 

And here is a little rule of thumb we want you to bear 
constantly in mind while you are having rapid fire: 
Load your piece quickly, but aim and squeeze your trig- 
ger deliberately. Keep cool. 

The best shot in the company is the man who prac- 
tises the most. 

Go to the supplement for a fuller and more technical 
discussion of the art and science of shooting. 


CHAPTER X 


PRACTICE MARCH OR “ HIKE” 


The practice march usually lasts from seven to ten 
days and comes at the end of each camp. It will be the 
most instructive, the most pleasant, and one of the hard- 
est periods of your service. You will return from it 
proud of the hardships you have undergone and capable 
of speaking with authority on many practical matters 
pertaining to soldiering. You will be able to amuse 
yourself and your friends with reminiscences of the 
many incidents which you will never forget. It is dur- 
ing the practice march that you will put into practical 
use the tactical principles and battle formations of which, 
up to that time, you will have heard at lectures, or which 
you will have executed in a mechanical manner at drill. 
You will return from this march with a knowledge of 
many practical points on camp sanitation, of the pleas- 
ures and hardships incident to manceuver warfare, and 
of the manner in which a soldier adapts himself to 
changing conditions, all of which cannot be learned 
from books or lectures. 

The practice march demands a large expenditure of 
physical and mental energy; however, the hardships are 
greatly exaggerated by the second-year men. ‘To make 
up a set of equipment, to assist in cleaning up camp 


and loading trucks, to march and fight for a distance 
159 


160 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


of ten or twelve miles while carrying a heavy pack on 
the back and a nine-pound gun on the shoulder, and 
upon reaching camp to pitch your tent, make up your 
bed, do some fatigue work, and probably some guard 
duty in addition, all in one day, is a hard physical strain 
on the average man. By obeying implicitly the advice 
of your company commander, you will greatly lessen 
the hardships incident to a practice march, and by dis- 
obeying it you may possibly undergo the mortification 
of having to drop out of ranks and be jeered at by the 
passing column. The following suggestions, if fol- 
lowed implicitly, will lessen the hardship of the “hike.” 


MARCHING RULES 


1. Adjust your equipment, if necessary, at the first 
halt. 

2. Do not leave the column without the express per- 
mission of your company commander. 

3. Keep in your proper place in the column. 

4. Keep forty inches from the man in front of you. 


HALTS 


Halts are made for the purpose of resting. Take ad- 
vantage of the opportunity by sitting down at once 
along the side of the road near the place where your 
squad will form when the march is resumed. Remain 
seated until the command to fall in is given. 

Sit down in such a way that you do not support the 
weight of the pack on your shoulders while resting. 


PRACTICE MARCH OR “HIKE” 161 


Don’t go wandering off into people’s yards or orchards. 
Relax as completely as possible. 


CAM PING 


Two men tent together—the front rank man and his 
rear rank file. After pitching your tent, get inside and 
level off the ground. Cut a drain around the tent to 
carry the water off; this should be done even in pleasant 
weather. In case you do not trench your tent and a 
sudden rain comes, your blankets may get wet and you 
will probably lose some much-needed rest and sleep. If 
the tent pins will not stay in the ground, cut some small 
sticks to a length of about twelve inches and use them as 
tent pins. : 


PREPARING YOUR BED 


After you have pitched your tent, get some hay, 
grass, straw, or leaves and cover the floor. Place one 
poncho on this, then one or two blankets on top of the 
poncho to sleep on, and use the remaining blankets as 
cover. Spread the other poncho over the tent. Many 
men are careless about making a comfortable bed. You 
will be rewarded with large dividends if you are zealous 
in making yourself comfortable. Arrange your equip- 
ment at the rear just under the small triangle. Get 
your meat can, knife, fork, spoon, and tin cup out where 


they will be handy. 


162 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


MAKING UP YOUR PACK 


Immediately after reveille, take down your tent and 
make up your pack. Place your extra blankets on the 
pile with those of the other members of your squad. 
Make up your surplus kit bundle and put it in the sur- 
plus kit bag. 

WATER 

Fill your canteen each evening, as the water wagons 
sometimes do not reach camp before the morning march 
is commenced. Excessive water drinking on the march 
is the besetting sin of the inexperienced soldier. One 
swallow of water calls for another. Soon your canteen 
is empty. Your stomach feels uncomfortable. You 
are still thirsty. If it is necessary to replace some of 
the water of the body which is lost by perspiration, and 
this is often necessary, first gargle out the mouth and 
throat and spit the water out; then take a swallow or 
two, but be careful not to drink to excess. Injudicious 
and excessive water drinking fills the hospital ambu- 
lances and auto trucks with men who should be in ranks. 
One half a canteen of water is sufficient for you on any 
march you will have tomake. After you arrive in camp 
and have cooled off a little, drink as much water as you 
desire, but do so slowly. 


CARE OF THE FEET 
The infantryman’s feet are his means of transporta- 
tion. If you care for them properly, you will be re- 
warded. 


PRACTICE MARCH OR “HIKE” 163 

1. Wash and dry the feet carefully and put on clean 
socks as soon as practicable after getting into camp. 

2. Wash out the socks you have been wearing and 
hang them out to dry. 

3. Do not wear socks with holes in them if you can 
possibly avoid it. Should a hole begin to cause rub- 
bing, turn the sock inside out or change it to the other 
foot. 

4. Just as soon as you decide to attend a training 
camp, cut your toe nails square across the ends so they 
will not grow in. | 

5. In case of any foot trouble that you cannot relieve, 
report to the surgeon at once. Don’t wait until you 
cannot march before reporting. 

6. A Treatment for Blisters. Be careful not to 
tear off the skin covering the blister. Heat the point 
of a needle until it is red hot and when it cools insert it 
under the live skin a little distance away from the blister. 
Push it through to the under side of the bruised skin or 
blister and then press out the water. ‘To protect the 
blister, grease a small piece of chamois with vaseline and 
place it so that it covers the blister and extends over 
on the solid skin surrounding it. ‘Then place a piece of 
oxide adhesive tape over the chamois. This method al- 
lows the protective covering to be removed without rup- 
turing the skin over the blister and protects the new 
tender and sensitive skin so that the weight can be rested 
upon the foot without causing severe pain. One man 
in each squad should be provided with a needle, adhesive 


164 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


tape, a bottle of vaseline, and a piece of chamois for the 
common use of the squad. 
7. Shoes. 

a. Be sure they fit your feet. The business shoe 
you wear at the office won’t do for marching 
when, with the additional weight you carry, 
your foot spreads in breadth and extends in 
length; hence your marching shoes should be 
longer and broader than your business shoes. 
This is a very important.item and should not 
be neglected. If your shoes are too large, 
blisters will result; if too small, your foot will 
be cramped, and every step will be painful. 

b. Break your shoes in prior to the practice march. 

ce. Keep your shoes well oiled so they will be soft 
and pliable and keep out water. 

d. If your shoes get wet on the inside heat some 
small pebbles (not so hot as to burn leather) 
and keep them inside the shoes until dry. 


CAMP SANITATION 


In camp you are really your brother’s keeper. It is 
the duty of every man to keep the camp clean, sanitary, 
and livable. Constantly bear in mind that a great 
number of men are living together in a very small area; 
that food is being prepared in the open; that there are 
no sewers; and that the ground or dust and streams must 
not be polluted. Obey conscientiously and diligently 
the following rules: 


PRACTICE MARCH OR “HIKE” 165 


1. Don’t take food to your tent. 

2. Use the latrines that are provided. 

3. When possible bathe each day as soon as prac- 
ticable after you arrive at camp. 

4. Don’t throw food or fruit peeling on the ground. 

5. Dispose of any food you cannot eat by burning 
in the kitchen incinerator. 

6. Keep away from the kitchen and cooks. 

7. Don’t dip your cup in the drinking water re- 
ceptacle. Use the dipper provided for that pur- 
pose. 

8. If sick, report to a surgeon. 

9. Don’t litter up the camp with paper. 

10. Get your drinking water and bathe at the author- 
ized places. The camp commander always designates 
different places for cooking and drinking water, for 
watering the animals, for bathing and _ washing 
clothes. 

11. On leaving camp the ground should be in better 
condition than when you arrived. All sinks, latrines, 
ditches, and holes are filled and the earth stamped 
down; all combustibles that have no value should be 
burned and noncombustible matter either buried or piled 
so it can be carted away. 

12. All deposits in the rears should be covered with 
earth. 

MISCELLANEOUS 

1. Take great pains each morning to make a neat, 

small and solid pack and strap it up securely. 


166 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


2. Don’t put your pack on until ordered to do so by 
your company commander or first sergeant. 

3. Get your pack properly adjusted. 

4, Don’t take your equipment off during the ten- 
minute halt allowed for resting. 

5. Don’t eat anything or patronize the soft drink 
stand during a march. 

6. Retire early and get a good night’s rest. 

7. Use only heavy or light wool socks and see that 
they fit perfectly. If you cannot wear wool socks, try 
cotton and then silk socks. 

8. Don’t overeat or overdrink. 

9. A light pair of sneakers or canvas tennis shoes 
are serviceable for camp wear in the afternoons and are 
restful to the feet. 

10. Each morning sprinkle a little taleum powder or 
footease in the shoes. 

11. Keep the bowels functioning properly. Should _ 
you become constipated, report to the doctor for medi- 
cine before you begin to feel badly. 

12. Clean your mess kit immediately after each meal. 

13. Respect the property of others. 


EQUIPMENT 


During the hike your equipment for living will be lim- 
ited to: (1) your pack (things that you carry on your 
back), (2) a few authorized articles which are placed in 
a squad laundry bag (called a surplus kit), and (3) a 
blanket roll. 


PRACTICE MARCH OR “HIKE” = 167 


Contents of the Pack 


bacon can. 1 comb and any other toi- 
condiment can. let articles desired. 
blanket. cake of soap. 


poncho. or 2 towels. 


1 
1 
shelter half (one-half of 1 extra suit of underwear. 
1 
1 


a 


a small tent). pair socks. 
5 small tent pins. 


1 tooth brush. 
Contents of Surplus Kit 


1 pair of breeches. 1 shoe laces. 
1 suit of underwear. 2 pair of socks. 
1 shirt, olive drab. 1 pair of shoes (tan). 


pair shoe strings. 


Any other article that may be prescribed by the com- 
pany commander. 

The surplus kit of each man will be made up into a 
neat, compact bundle, tied with a string (use a shoe 
string for the purpose), and tagged with the owner’s 
name. ‘These individual kits will be packed in a laun- 
dry bag, called “surplus kit bag,” tagged, one for each 
squad, 


Contents of Blanket Roll 


. Extra blankets. 


Nh. 


. One ramrod for each squad. 
. Any other articles that may be prescribed by the 
company commander. 

Each squad makes these extra blankets, etc., into a 


w 


168 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


long roll which is called the “squad blanket roll.” A 
tag is tied to it, showing to what regiment, company, 
and squad it belongs. 


Notes 


1. The bacon can is a convenient place to carry a 
small face towel, shaving outfit, and other small toilet 
articles. 

2. Keep your soap in a soap box. 

3. Each squad should have its own cleaning material 
which should be tied into a small package and carried 
in the surplus kit bag. 

4. Interest in the hike and the manceuvers will be 
stimulated if at least one member of each squad has a 
map showing all the camp sites and route of march. 


CHAPTER XI 


OFFICERS’ RESERVE CORPS 


To make it possible to fill the gaps made in the Regu- 
lar Army, by the heavy loss of commissioned officers 
which is inevitable in time of war and to make it possible 
to train large volunteer armies which are called into ex- 
istence when war is imminent or actually upon the coun- 
try, the Government has provided for an Officers’ 
Reserve Corps. 

It is, indeed, a patriotic and far-sighted act on the 
part of a citizen to become a reserve officer, for, by so 
doing, he will increase his measure of usefulness for the 
time when his country will need him most and when he 
will, if he is a real, virile man, desire to be of the utmost 
service to his country. 

The President alone is authorized to appoint officers 
in the Reserve Corps. Each officer must be physically, 
mentally, and morally qualified to hold his commission. 

The highest rank in the reserve corps will be that of 
major. 

Age limits for appointment in the line of the Reserve 
Corps: 

2nd Lieutenants must be under 32 years of age. 
Ist Lieutenants must be under 36 years of age. 


Captains must be under 40 years of age. 
169 


170 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


Majors must be under 45 years of age. 

If you are considering taking the examination to en- 
ter the Officers’ Reserve Corps, write to the Department 
Commander in whose department you live, and make 
your intentions known. Ask for these items: Ist, An 
application blank. 2d, “General Orders No. 32, War 
Department, July 28, 1916,” with amendments thereto. 
3d, Any additional information that you should know. 
In reply you will receive instructions in full from the 
Adjutant General. General Orders No. 32 gives the 
subjects in which you will be examined. 


GENERAL INFORMATION CONCERNING THE OFFICERS’ 
RESERVE CORPS 


An officer in the Reserve Corps cannot, without his 
consent, be called into service in a lower grade than that 
held by him in the Reserve Corps. 

When a Reserve Officer reaches the age limit fixed for 
appointment or reappointment in the grade in which 
commissioned, he will be honorably discharged from the 
service of the United States and he will be entitled to 
retain his official title, and, on occasions of ceremony, to 
_wear the uniform of the highest grade he held in the 
Reserve Corps. ‘The preceding provisions as to ages 
of officers do not apply to the appointment or reappoint- 
ment of officers of the Quartermaster, Engineer, Ord- 
nance, Signal, Judge Advocate, and Medical Sections 
of the Reserve Corps. 

A commission in the Reserve Corps will cover a period 


OFFICERS’ RESERVE CORPS 171 


of five years, except as provided in the preceding para- 
graph, unless sooner terminated in the discretion of the 
President. An officer may be recommissioned,. either 
in the same or a higher grade for successive periods of 
five years, subject to examination and age limits. 

To become eligible for appointment as an officer of 
the Officers’ Reserve Corps a man must be not less than 
twenty-one years of age and must be a citizen of the 
United States. No applicant will be examined who is 
an officer on the active list of the National Guard. 


THE OFFICERS RESERVE CORPS IN WAR 


In time of actual or threatened hostilities the Presi- 
dent can order officers of the Reserve Corps to tempo- 
rary duty with the Regular Army, or as officers at re- 
cruiting rendezvous and depots, or on such duty as he 
may prescribe. An officer thus called into service re- 
ceives the same pay and allowances as an officer of the 
same rank in the Regular Army. When thus called 
out Reserve Officers may be promoted in rank to va- 
cancies in volunteer organizations.. Retired officers of 
the Officers’ Reserve Corps are not entitled to retired - 
pay but are entitled to pensions for disability incurred 
in line of duty and while in active service. When called 
out for active service an officer in the Reserve Corps will 
be required to obey the laws and regulations for the gov- 
ernment of the Army of the United States in so far as 
they are applicable to officers whose permanent reten- 
tion in the military service is not contemplated. 


172 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


INSTRUCTION OF OFFICERS OF THE RESERVE CORPS 


During peace the Secretary of War can order any 
Reserve Officer to duty for instruction for a period not 
to exceed fifteen days in any one calendar year. While 
so serving, an officer will receive the pay and allowance 
of his grade in the Regular Army. ‘This period of serv- 
ice may be extended with the consent of the Reserve 
Officer. By thus extending such periods of instruction 
a Reserve Officer may, at the conclusion thereof, be ex- 
amined for promotion to the next higher grade. 

Any citizen who has creditably attended the prescribed 
series of three training camps (covering in all a period 
of three months) shall, after undergoing the required 
physical and practical examination, be eligible for ap- 
pointment in the Officers’ Reserve Corps. 

The examinations for Reserve Corps commissions are 
for the purpose of ascertaining the practical ability of 
the applicant. The record of all the service and train- 
ing the applicant has had at training camps is consid- 
ered as part of the examination. 

Those desiring to enter the Officers’ Reserve eae 
may elect any of the following sections: 


. Infantry Officers’ Reserve Corps. 

. Cavalry Officers’ Reserve Corps. 

. Field Artillery Officers’ Reserve Corps. 

. Coast Artillery Officers’ Reserve Corps. 

. Medical (to include the reserve officers of the Medi- 


Co & © Ww 


OFFICERS’ RESERVE CORPS 178 


cal Corps, Dental Corps, and Veterinary Corps) 
Officers’ Reserve Corps. 

. Adjutant General’s Officers’ Reserve Corps. 

. Judge Advocate General’s Officers’ Reserve Corps. 

. Inspector General’s Officers’ Reserve Corps. 

. Quartermaster Officers’ Reserve Corps. 

10. Engineer Officers’ Reserve Corps. 

11. Ordnance Officers’ Reserve Corps. 

12. Signal Officers’ Reserve Corps. 


oo at OS 


REPORTS TO BE MADE 
Officers in the Officers’ Reserve Corps are required 
to report at once to the Adjutant General of the Depart- 
ment in which they live or to the heads of the Staff Corps 
or Departments to which they may belong of any perma- 
net change of address. If a change of address to any 
other department is involved the adjutant of each de- 


partment should be notified. 


THE RESERVE OFFICERS’ TRAINING CORPS 
The President is authorized to establish and maintain 
in civil educational institutions a Reserve Officers’ Train- 
ing Corps which shall consist of senior and junior di- 
visions. 
SENIOR DIVISION 
A senior division of the Reserve Officers’ Training 


' Corps may be established at any university and college 
requiring of its students four years of collegiate study 


174 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


for a degree, and at essentially military schools which, 
as a result of annual inspection of such institutions by 
the War Department, are especially designated as quali- 
fied to establish a unit of the senior division. Authori- 
ties of the former (universities and colleges not essen- 
tially military) must establish and maintain a two years’ 
elective or compulsory course of military training, as 
a minimum, for its physically fit male students. This 
course, when entered upon, must in the case of such 
students be a prerequisite for graduation. 

When any member of this senior division has com- 
pleted two academic years of service in that division; has 
been selected by the president of the institution and by 
its professor of military science and tactics (who must 
be an army officer) ; has made a written agreement to 
continue in the Reserve Officers’ Training Corps for the 
remainder of his course in the institution, devoting five 
hours per week to the military training prescribed by 
the Secretary of War; has also made a written agree- 
ment to pursue the courses in training camps (one camp 
of not more than six weeks’ duration each year) pre- 
scribed by the Secretary of War)—when he has fulfilled 
all these conditions, he may be given, at the expense of 
the United States, a money commutation of subsistence 
at a rate not exceeding the cost of the garrison (army) 
ration during the remainder of his service in the Reserve 
Officers’ Training Corps. ‘This will amount to about 
thirty cents a day. This provision applies a to the 
senior division. 


OFFICERS’ RESERVE CORPS 175 


JUNIOR DIVISION 

A junior division of the Reserve Officers’ Training 
Corps may be established at any institution to which an 
army officer has been detailed as the professor of mili- 
tary science and tactics, and which cannot meet the nec- 
essary requirements for the senior division. In this case 
the Government does not give a commutation of sub- 
sistence and the students are not asked to obligate them- 
selves as in the senior division. 


TO ENTER THE RESERVE OFFICERS CORPS 


The President is authorized, under such regulations 
as he may prescribe, to appoint in the Officers’ Reserve 
Corps any graduate of the senior division of the Reserve 
Officers’ ‘Training Corps, who shall have satisfactorily 
completed the two-year course of training (five hours 
a week), incident to receiving,a commutation of rations; 
also any graduate of the junior division who shall have 
satisfactorily completed the courses of military training 
prescribed for students of the senior divisions, referred 
to in the first part of this paragraph, and shall have par- 
ticipated in such practical instruction, subsequent to 
graduation, as the Secretary of War shall have pre- 
scribed. ‘They must be twenty-one years of age and 
must make written agreement under oath to serve the 
United States for ten years. 

Any physically fit male citizen of the United States, 
between the ages of twenty-one and twenty-seven years, 


176 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


who graduated prior to June 22, 1916, from any educa- 
tional institution at which an officer of the Army was 
detailed as professor of military science and tactics, and 
who, while a student at such institution, completed 
courses of military training substantially equivalent to 
those prescribed for the senior division of the Reserve 
Officers’ ‘Training Corps, may, after satisfactorily com- 
pleting such additional practical military training as the 
Secretary of War shall prescribe, be eligible for appoint- 
ment to the Officers’ Reserve Corps. 

The President can appoint and commission, as a tem- 
porary second leutenant of the Regular Army in time 
of peace, for the purpose of instruction and for a period 
not to exceed six months, any Reserve Officer who was 
appointed in the manner described in the two preceding 
paragraphs. A temporary second lieutenant will re- 
ceive the allowance authorized by law for that grade 
and pay at the rate of $100 a month. He will be at- 
tached to a unit of the Regular Army for duty and train- 
ing. At the end of the six months he will revert to the 
status of a Reserve Officer. i 


DEPARTMENT COMMANDER'S REPORT 


At the end of each calendar year department com- 
manders and chiefs of staff corps and departments com- 
pile lists of members of the Officers’ Reserve Corps un- 
der their command, showing: 

(a) Name, rank, age, and address. 


OFFICERS’ RESERVE CORPS 177 


(b) Amount of instruction received. 

(c) Progress made. 

(d) Efficiency of officer. 

(e) Recommendation. 

A copy of these lists will be forwarded to the Adjutant 
General of the Army. 

The remainder of this chapter boils down to an irre- 
ducible minimum some of the most important subjects 
with which a Reserve Officer or an applicant for a com- 
mission in the Officers’ Reserve Corps should be famil- 
iar. It in no way covers the subjects in which an appli- 
eant for a commission will be examined. It merely 
opens up a broad field of study for a reserve officer and 
at the same time can be used as a place of reference. 


THE LAND FORCES OF THE UNITED STATES 


You now are, or expect to become, a member of the 
land forces of the United States. Of what do the land 
forces of the United States consist? They consist of 
the Regular Army, the Organized Land Militia, when 
called into the service of the United States, and such 
volunteer forces as Congress may authorize. 'The last 
two become available only under certain conditions. 

The land forces are grouped under two general heads: 

(1) The Mobile Army. 

(2) The Coast Artillery. 

“The Mobile Army. The mobile army is primarily 
organized for offensive operations against an enemy, 
and on this account requires the maximum degree of 


178 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


mobility.” (Field Service Regulations.) It consists 
of: 

Infantry. 

Field Artillery. 

Cavalry. 

Engineers. 

Signal Corps ‘Troops. 

“The Coast Artillery. 'The coast artillery is charged 
with the care and use of the fixed and movable elements 
of the land and coast fortifications.” (Field Service 
Regulations. ) 

The President of the United States is the Comman- 
der-in-Chief of the Army. He exercises his command 
through the Secretary of War. ‘The Chief of Staff acts 
as military adviser to the Secretary of War. He puts 
into effect the Administration’s wishes. 

For the purpose of equipping, inspecting, directing, 
and administering to the Army, there are the following 
corps and departments: 

) General Staff Corps. 

) Adjutant General’s Department. 

) Inspector General’s Department. 

) Judge Advocate General’s Department. 
) Quartermaster Corps. 

) Medical Department. 

) Ordnance Department. 

) Bureau of Insular Affairs. 

) Signal Corps. 

) Engineer Corps. 


OFFICERS’ RESERVE CORPS 179 


The following are the grades of rank and commands 
of officers and noncommissioned officers: 


(1) Lieutenant-General (We have no lieutenant-generals 
at present.) 

(2) Major-General Commands: Division. 

(3) Brigadier-General Commands: Brigade. 

(4) Colonel Commands: Regiment. 

(5) Lieutenant-Colonel Second in command in a Regiment. 

(6) Major Commands: Battalion. 

(7) Captain Commands: Company. 

(8) First Lieutenant Commands: Platoon. 

(9) Second Lieutenant Commands: Platoon. 

(10) Veterinarian He has no command. 

(11) Cadet at United States Military Academy—He has no com- 
mand. 

(12) Sergeant-Major He has no command. 
(Regimental) 

(13) Ordnance Sergeant He has no command. 

(14) Quartermaster Sergeant He has no command. 

(15) Sergeant-Major He has no command. 
( Battalion) 

(16) First Sergeant Commands: Platoon. 

(17) Sergeant Commands: Sometimes a Platoon. 

(18) Corporal Commands: Squad. 


ARTICLES OF WAR 


The Army is governed by the Articles of War, which 
ean be found in the Army Regulations. Any laws, 
orders, et cetera, pertaining to the Army must not vio- 
late directly or indirectly any of the Articles of War. 
It is therefore desirable that each Reserve Officer know 
where to find them and become, in a general way, fa- 
miliar with them. 


180 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


GENERAL ADVICE 


To become a first-class drillmaster is desirable and 
necessary. But, being one, you are not to be intrusted 
with the command of troops in the field unless you have 
gone much farther than that. ‘To become an excellent 
drillmaster means simply that you have mastered a de- 
tail. In order to become one you should bear this in 
mind: You cannot teach a man how to do a thing un- 
less you know that thing yourself. If you don’t know 
your drill, don’t try to “bluff” your men. Burn the 
midnight oil, or remain a private. 


MILITARY CORRESPONDENCE 


An official letter should refer to one subject only. 

In writing to the War Department address your let- 
ter to “The Adjutant General of the Army, Washing- 
tone | 

The United States (including colonies) is divided 
into the following departments: 

(1) The Eastern Department, with Headquarters 
at Governor’s Island, New York. 

(2) The Central Department, with Headquarters at 
Chicago, Illinois. 

(3) The Southern Department, with Headquarters 
at Fort Sam Houston, Texas. 

(4) The Western Department, with Headquarters 
at San Francisco, California. 

(5) The Philippine Department with Headquarters 
at Manila, P. I. 


OFFICERS’ RESERVE CORPS 181 


(6) The Hawaiian Department, with Headquarters 
at Honolulu, Hawau. 

You will be in one of these departments. Address 
your communication te “The Commanding General” at 
his department headquarters. 

Answer all official communications promptly. This 
is important. Letters must be written, folded, signed 
as prescribed by the War Department. Models illus- 
trating the system are furnished by the Adjutant Gen- 
eral’s office, Washington, D. C. “Ind.” is the abbrevi- 
ation for indorsement. 


(CorrESPONDENCE Mopet) 
2039 COMPANY B, 40TH INFANTRY, 
i Forr Wiiiiam H. Sewarp, 
Alaska, July 19, 1916. 
From: The Commanding Officer, Co. B, 40th Inf. 
To: The Adjutant General of the Army 
(Through military channels.) 
Subject: Philippine campaign badge, Corporal John Doe. 


Inclosed are lists in duplicate of ‘the enlisted men of Company 
B, 40th Infantry, entitled to the Philippine campaign badge. 
2 Incls. 
Joun A. Brown, 
-Capt., 40th Inf. 
Ist IND. 
824 . 
Hq. Ft. William H. Seward, Alaska, July 19th, 1916.— 
To the Comdg. Gen., Western Department, San Francisco, Cali- 
fornia, 
AYE ARS 
Brig.-Gen., Comdg. 


182 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


2p IND. 


2 Incls. 
Stamp) Rec’d Western Department, July 30, 1916. 
p ? y. ’ 
Notre. This correspondence is not complete but it illustrates 
} p 
how to write a military letter and indorsement. ) 


USE OF THE COMBINED ARMS 


Every efficient officer must realize the possibilities and 
limitations of his own arm of the service as well as the 
possibilities and limitations of the other arms. Each 
arm of the service is necessary and important. A proper 
understanding of the use of the combined arms is as 
essential to success in battle as cooperation between the 
different members of a football team is to its success. 
Don’t “knock” any arm but the one you are in, and 
don’t knock that unless you are willing to admit you are 
not man enough to improve it. 


INFANTRY 


“The infantry is the principal and most important 
arm, which is charged with the main work on the field 
of battle and it usually decides the final issue of the com- 
bat.” (Field Service Regulations.) The role (duty 
or job) of the infantry, whether offensive or defensive, 
is the role of the entire force. If it fails, all fail. When 
properly supported by artillery, trained infantrymen 
armed with rifles, bayonets, and the will to put the en- 
emy out of action, will settle all issues. 


OFFICERS’ RESERVE CORPS 183 


ARTILLERY 


The chief duty of the artillery is to support the in- 
fantry. It does this in three ways: Ist, By firing at 
the hostile infantry. 2d, By putting out of action the 
hostile artillery so that it cannot fire at the infantry. 
3d, By demolishing the obstacles in front of the enemy’s 
works. It smothers the enemy with a curtain of fire, 
so that the infantry can move forward without ruinous 
losses. Codperation with the infantry is essential. If 
the infantry is defeated the artillery covers its with- 
drawal; if the infantry is successful the artillery moves 
forward and assists in reaping the full reward of victory 
by firing on the fleeing enemy. The present European 
War has greatly increased the prestige and importance 
of this arm of the service. The amount of artillery on 
the Western front and the amount of ammunition con- 
sumed daily is appalling. 


CAVALRY 


This very important arm is the eye with which the 
general sees for many miles to the front and flank. In 
an advance it pushes ahead, combs the country for the 
enemy, disperses his .cavalry, and thus protects the in- 
fantry in the rear. It locates the enemy, and occupies 
his attention until the infantry comes up. It protects 
the flanks and rear of the infantry and artillery during 
the fight. If needed, it joins in the fight. If the in- 


184 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


fantry is defeated it covers the withdrawal, and if the 
infantry wins it pursues and pounces upon the enemy. 


MACHINE GUNS 


Before the present European War, machine guns 
were classified as emergency weapons. It was not be- 
lieved that they could remain long in action, because 
they would soon be silenced by hostile fire (artillery and 
infantry). It was recommended, therefore, that a fa- 
vorable opportunity be awaited before opening fire which 
was to be delivered with their utmost effectiveness. 
They were believed to possess very limited possibilities 
in an attacking line, but as being most valuable in de- 
fensive works where protection and concealment could 
be found. 

During this war they have lost, as a defensive weapon, 
no prestige. They have also proved of great value to 
the attacking side. ‘They are being made light and 
portable to accompany the firing line in an attack. ‘The 
supply of ammunition alone limits the number that can 
be used. : 

Fach side in the present war has used them by the 
thousands with effectiveness. Machine guns are more 
worthy of consideration to-day than heretofore. 


BOMBS AND HAND GRENADES 


The present European War has revived the use of 
hand grenades and bombs. A certain number of sol- 
diers in each British and French battalion are trained 


OFFICERS’ RESERVE CORPS 185 


as grenade throwers. ‘Their principal weapon is a 
bucket or bag of grenades or bombs. ‘They operate not 
only from trenches but accompany the firing line in an 
attack and dispose of sheltered or isolated group of the 
enemy by smothering their. position with a shower of 
hand grenades or bombs. 

These weapons are in the first stages of development 
in this country. ‘They offer to the service practically a 
virgin field of opportunities. Some Reserve Officers 
might make a specialty of this subject and assist in its 
development. 


NIGHT OPERATIONS 


“By employing night operations troops make use of 
the cover of darkness to minimize losses from hostile fire, 
to escape observation, to gain time.” (Infantry Drill 
Regulations.) They are dangerous because control is 
difficult and confusion is frequently unavoidable. Only 
trained troops should be used, and the formation must be 
simple. Don’t attempt anything complicated. 

Observe the following suggestions. For an attack or 
offensive movement: 

(1) Study by daylight and after dark, if possible, the 
ground you are to cross. 

(2) Make careful preparations with secrecy. 

(3) Avoid fire action. Pieces should not be loaded. 
Rely on the bayonet. 

(4) Give each unit a definite objective and direction. 
Avoid collision. 


186 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


(5) Have each man wear a distinctive badge. (For 
instance, a white band on one arm.) 

If on the defensive and you expect a night attack, 
place obstacles in front of your position, heavily patrol 
your front, fix bayonets, move up your supports, open 
fire as soon as results may be expected, and illuminate 
the foreground. 


OBSTACLES 


The main object in placing obstacles in front of a de- 
fensive position is to delay the enemy while he is under 
the defender’s fire, and thus make his advance as diff-. 
cult as possible. To accomplish this result they must 
be so placed that the enemy must cross them. ‘They 
must not interfere with the defender’s view or fire; they 
must not be easily destroyed by artillery fire; they must 
not afford concealment to the enemy; and they must be 
so made that they will not obstruct a counter attack on 
the part of the defenders. The present war has demon- 
strated that the barb wire entanglement fulfils more of 
these requirements than any other form of obstacle.— 
See Engineer Department’s “Manual on Field Fortifi- 
cations” on how to construct obstacles. 


MEETING ENGAGEMENTS 


When two hostile forces suddenly meet we have what | 
is termed a “meeting engagement.” Very little or no 
reconnaissance is possible: ‘There is an absence of 
trenches. Both sides deploy rapidly. ‘The smaller the 


OFFICERS’ RESERVE CORPS 187 


force the more frequently will it fight a meeting engage- 
ment. ‘Therefore, it is of the utmost importance to 
junior officers. A great advantage will accrue to the 
side which can deploy the faster. ‘The leader who has 
intuition, initiative, who can make a quick decision and 
is willing to take a long chance, will have a great ad- 
vantage. 


WITHDRAWAL FROM ACTION 


“The withdrawal of a defeated force can generally be 
effected only at a heavy cost.” (Infantry Drill Regu- 
lations.) When a withdrawal is necessary, make every 
possible effort to place distance and a rear guard be- 
tween you and the enemy. Have one part of your line 
withdraw under protection of the fire of the other part 


and so on. Reorganize your command as soon as pos- 
sible. 


INTRENCH MENTS 


“Ordinarily infantry intrenches itself whenever it is 
compelled to halt for a considerable time in_ the 
presence of the enemy.” (Infantry Drill Regulations. ) 
Trenches are constructed with a view of giving cover 
which will diminish losses, but they must not be so built 
or placed as to interfere with the free use of the rifle. 
A good field of fire is the first consideration. ‘The con- 
struction of a trench is simple, but the location of it is 
difficult. If possible, trenches are laid out in company 
lengths. 

Intrenchments usually take the following form: 


188 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


(1) Hasty Cover. Constructed by troops with the 
tools they carry on their person. It is a shallow trench 
with a parapet at least three feet thick and one foot high. 
It furnishes cover against riffe fire, but scarcely any 
against shrapnel. 

(2) Fire Trench. It should be deep and narrow with 
the parapet flat and concealed. While in it, the troops 
fire at the enemy; hence the name fire trench. 

Usual forms of fire trenches are as shown in the fol- 
lowing illustration: 


Pranks or poles and § Fockets may be fo Yinecessary excinene 
lle st ¢ vated forammunttian gf 9 for feet when 
onter work on Fi 7) alls d (-4 ff | so g Suiting 
Chantermned ater carpe 4 No parape eee 


On fig2 


(3) Cover Trenches. 'The supports sleep and live 
in these trenches; hence they are covered. The cover 
(roof) must be thick enough to afford protection from 
high angle artillery fire. It is placed as near the fire 
trench as possible. 

(4) Communicating Trenches. These connect fire 
trenches with the cover trenches and the cover trenches 
with any trenches (reserve) in rear where natural cov- 


OFFICERS’ RESERVE CORPS 189 


ered communication is impracticable. They are zig- 
zagged to escape being enfiladed. (‘That is, to prevent 
one explosion from doing too much damage in a single 
trench.) During an engagement, troops by using these 
trenches can go safely to the help of the troops in the 
fire trenches. They are usually deep and narrow. 
The following diagram illustrates the use of the three 


re 


Communicating 


trenches: 


over Trenc 


MILITARY MAPS 

Definition. “A military map is a drawing made to 
represent some section of the country, showing the fea- 
tures that are of military importance, such as roads, 
bridges, streams, houses, and hills. ‘The map must be 
so drawn that you can tell the distance between any two 
points, the heights of the hills, and the relative positions 
of everything shown.” (Field Service Regulations. ) 

In the field the military maps are supplemented by 
sketches, or field maps, prepared from day to day. For 
facility in reading, military maps are made according to 
a uniform system of scales and contour intervals as fol- 
lows: 


190 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


Road Sketches. 'Three inches on the map is equal to 
1 mile on the ground, contour intervals of 20 feet. 

Position and Outpost Sketches. Six inches on the 
map are equal to 1 mile on the ground, contour intervals 
of 10 feet. 

Maneeuver or War Game Maps. ‘Twelve inches on 
the map are equal to 1 mile on the ground, contour in- 
tervals of 5 feet. | 

Large Strategical Maps for Extended Maneuvers. 
One inch on the map is equal to 1 mile on the ground, 
contour intervals of 60 feet. 

Every officer in the Reserve Corps should be able to 
read a military map and make a road, an outpost, and 
a position sketch. 


BAYONET 


Importance of the Bayonet. The infantry soldier is 
armed with a bayonet. He relies mainly on fire action 
to disable the enemy, but he should know that it is often 
necessary for him to cross bayonets with the enemy. 
Therefore he must be instructed in the use of the rifle 
and the bayonet in hand-to-hand encounters. The pres- 
ent Kuropean War is demonstrating the importance of 
this instruction. If you do not receive instruction in 
bayonet fighting at a federal training camp, it will not 
be because it is unimportant, but because there is no 
available time to give it. Any Reserve Officer can well 
afford to specialize in this work. 


OFFICERS’ RESERVE CORPS 191 


AMMUNITION 


An infantry soldier goes into battle carrying 220 
rounds of rifle ammunition. He habitually carries in 
his belt 100 rounds and when a fight is imminent he gets 
120 rounds (2 bandoliers) from his combat train. He 
keeps 30 rounds in the right pocket section of his belt 
to be expended only when ordered by an officer. 

A cavalryman goes into battle carrying 150 rounds of 
rifle ammunition and 40 rounds of pistol ammunition. 
He habitually carries in his belt 90 rounds of rifle and 
20 rounds of pistol ammunition. When about to go 
into a fight he gets 60 rounds of rifle and 20 rounds of 
pistol ammunition from his combat train. 

All officers must train their men to economize in the 
use of ammunition. ‘Train service, even by rail for am- 
munition, would be inadequate if this were not done. 


TRANSPORTATION 


~ Organization commanders are responsible for all un- 
authorized material or supplies that may be put on their 
wagons. You should therefore become acquainted with 
the transportation attached to the smaller organizations. 
The wagons that carry your ammunition are called the 
Combat Train. ‘The wagons that carry your authorized 
baggage, kitchen equipment, and food are called the 
Field Train. 
THE RATION 

A ration is the allowance (money) for the subsistence 

of one person for one day. It is based on the cost of a 


192 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


fixed amount of certain foods (such as meat, potatoes, 
bread, etc.) necessary for a workingman. As the cost 
of food in the different sections of the country varies, 
so does the cost of the ration. ‘There are several kinds 
of ration based on what the soldier is doing and the cli- 
mate he is in. If you are ever in command of a com- 
pany, whether in the field or in barracks, one of your 
most important duties will be to supervise the cooking 
and messing of your company. You should, therefore, 
become familiar with the following rations: 

(1) Garrison rations. Used by troops in garrison 
and during peace and on manceuvers. 

(2) Reserve ration. Carried on the person and in 
the trains. 

(3) Field ration. The ration prescribed by the com- 
mander of a field force. 

(4) Travel ration. Used when traveling. 

(5) Emergency ration. Used by troops on an active 
campaign in an emergency. 

(6) Filipino ration. For use of Filipino Scouts. 


PROPERTY 


In the absence of regulations on the subject, each Re- 
serve Officer should own a good watch, a pair OF field 
glasses, a compass, and a note book. 


GUARD DUTY 


Guards are used in camp or garrison to preserve or- 
der, to protect property, and to enforce police regula- 


OFFICERS’ RESERVE CORPS 193 


tions. ‘The commander of the guard is an officer or 
non-commissioned officer. He performs his duties un- 
der the supervision of the officer of the day. A sentinel 
is on post two hours out of every six. And a tour of 
guard duty is twenty-four hours. As guard duty is of 
such utmost importance, and laxity, or failure to per- 
form it properly, is very severely punished, the duties 
of all connected with it are clearly prescribed in the 
Guard Manual. | 

Orders for sentinels are divided into two classes, gen- 
eral and special. Hach should be memorized. Special 
orders relate to particular posts and duties. General 
orders apply to all sentinels and are as follows: 

“(1) ‘To take charge of this post and all government 
property in view. 

“(2) ‘To walk my post in a military manner, keeping 
always on the alert and observing everything that takes 
place within sight or hearing. 

“(3) To report all violations of orders I am in- 
structed to enforce. | 

“(4) 'To repeat all calls from posts more distant from 
the guard house than my own. 

“(5) To quit my post only when properly relieved. 

“(6) To receive, obey, and pass on to the sentinel 
who relieves me all orders from the commanding officer, 
officer of the day, and officers and noncommissioned of- 
ficers of the guard only. 

“(7) To talk to no one except in line of duty. 

(8) In case of fire or disorder to give the alarm. 


194 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


“(9) 'To allow no one to commit a nuisance on or 
near my post. 

(10) In any case not covered by instructions to call 
the corporal of the guard. 

“(11) To be especially watchful at night, and, dur- 
ing the time for challenging, to challenge all persons on 
or near my post, and to allow no one to pass without 
proper authority.” (Guard Manual.) 


SALUTING 


Saluting distance is that within which recognition is 
easy. In general it does not exceed thirty paces. 

A junior, who is mounted, dismounts before address- 
ing a senior who is dismounted. If the senior is mounted 
the junior does not dismount when addressing him. 


A junior officer walks or rides on the left of his senior. 

National Anthem. Whenever the National Anthem is played at any 
place when persons belonging to the military service are present all 
officers and enlisted men not in formation shall stand at attention 
facing toward the music (except at retreat, when they shall face toward 
the flag). If in uniform, covered or uncovered, or in civilian clothes, 
uncovered, they shall salute at the first note of the anthem, retaining 
the position of salute until the last note of the anthem. If not 
in uniform and covered they shall uncover at the first note of the 
anthem, holding the headdress opposite the left shoulder and so 
remain until its close, except that in inclement weather the head- 
dress may be slightly raised. 

The same rules apply when (Zo the color or to the standard is sounded 
as when the National Anthem is played. 

When played by an Army band, the National Anthem shall be 
played through without repetition of any part not required to be 
repeated to make it complete. 

The same marks of respect prescribed for observance during the 


OFFICERS’ RESERVE CORPS 195 
playing of the National Anthem of the United States shall be shown 
toward the national anthem of any other country when played upon 
official occasions. 

Colors or Standards. Colors are the national and 
regimental flags of foot troops. Standards are the na- 
tional and regimental flags of cavalry or field artillery. 
When passing colors or standards, uncased (not in a 
waterproof case), the prescribed salute must always be 
rendered. By the prescribed salute is meant, if un- 
armed or armed with a saber which is sheathed, the 
“hand salute” ; if armed with a drawn saber, the “present 
saber.” If you, wearing civilian dress, pass them, un- 
cover and hold the headdress opposite the left shoulder 
with the right hand. 

BOOKS 


We recommend that each officer in the Reserve Corps 
read the following books. All except Moss’s “Manual 
for Officers” can be obtained from the Adjutant Gen- 
eral of the Army, Washington, D. C. Moss’s “Man- 
ual” and any other military book desired can be pur- 
chased from the United States Infantry Association, 
Union Trust Building, Washington, D. C. 

(1) “The Military Policy of the United States,” by 
Gen. E. Upton. 

(2) “The Guard Manual, United States Army.” 

(3) “The Field Service Regulations, United States 
Army.” 

(4) The Drill Regulations of the arm of the service 
to which you are assigned. | 


196 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


(5) “Officers’ Manual,’ by Major J. A. Moss, 
United States Infantry. 

(6) “First Aid to the Sick and Injured” (War De- 
partment Publication). 

(7) “Army Regulations” (to be used as a book of 
reference when needed). 

(8) “Manual of Military Training,” by Capt. Jas. 
A. Moss. 

It is highly desirable for every Reserve Officer to place 
his name on the mailing list at the Army Service School, 
Fort Leavenworth, Kansas. This costs about $1 a year 
and in return the officer receives much valuable informa- 
tion. Write to the Secretary for any further informa- 
tion desired on this subject. 


_ FIELD ORDERS 
Field orders, whether written or oral, should follow 
a certain form. ‘This decreases the probability of any 
vital part being left out and increases the probability of 
_ the receiver or reader understanding it. 
In the following form for an advance, note the order 
in which the paragraphs occur. ‘This is very important. 


FOR AN ADVANCE 


Field Orders (Title) 
No.— (Place) 
(Reference to map used) (Date and Hour) 


(1) (Information of enemy and of our 
Troops supporting troops) 
(2) (Plan of commander) 
(a) Independent (3) (a) (Instructions for independent 


OFFICERS’ RESERVE CORPS 197 


Cavalry: 
(Commander ) 
(Troops) 
(b) Advance Guard: 


(Commander) 
(Troops) 


(c) Main Body—in or- 
der of march: 
(Commander ) 


(d) Right (left) Flank 
Guard: 
(Commander) 

(Troops) 


(e) Signal Troops: 
(Commander ) 


cavalry—place and time of de- 
parture, roads or country to be 
covered, special mission) 

(b) (Instructions for advance 
guard—place and time of depar- 
ture, or distance at which it is to 
precede the main body, route, 
special mission) 

(c) (Instructions for main body— 
distance at which it is to follow 
the advance guard, or place and 
time of departure) 

(d) (Instructions for flank guard 
—place and time of departure, 
route, special mission) 

(e) (Instructions for signal troops 
—lines of information to be es- 
tablished, special mission) 

(x) (Instructions for outpost— 
when relieved subsequent duties) 


(4) (Instructions for field train—es- 
cort, distance in rear of column, or destination when different from 
that of main body, if disposition not previously covered in “Or- 
ders’’) 

(Instructions for sanitary, ammunition, supply and engineer 
trains when necessary ) 
(5) (Place of commander or where messages may be sent) 
(How and to whom issued) 
(Authentication) 


Notice in particular that the first thing in the body of 
the order is the information of the enemy and of sup- 
porting or friendly troops; 2d, the plan; 3d, the de- 
tailed instruction for executing the plan; 4th, the order 
to field train; 5th, the place where the commander can 
be found. 


198 


THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


All orders, whether for a retreat, an attack, a defense, 
the establishment of an outpost and so on, should take 


this general form. 


A MODEL ORDER FOR AN ADVANCE 


Field Orders 
No. 6 
Three inch Leavenworth 
Map 
Troops 
(a) Advance Guard: 
Major A. 
Ist Bn. & 8 mtd. order- 
lies, 1st Inf. 
Lj Oped Cine Aba 
7th Cavalry 
(b) Main Body—in or- 
der of March: 
Colonel B. 
Ist. Inf. (less Ist Bn.) 
2d Infantry 
Detachment 3d F. 
Hosp. 


“Hq. 1st Brigade, 1st Division, 

Fort Leavenworth, Kansas, 

20 "Aug: (08,98).P: oN: 
(1) Two regiments of hostile infantry 
are reported to have occupied VALLEY 
Fauus late this afternoon, en route for 
Easton. Small hostile cavalry patrols 
were seen two miles east of VALLEY 

FaLis:at 6° P.M. to-day. 

The remainder of our division is ex- 

pected to reach Fort LraveNwortTH 
to-morrow. 
(2) This brigade (less the 3d Inf. 
which has been directed to hold the 
Missouri river crossing at Fort Lrav- 
ENWORTH) will march to-morrow to 
Easton to hold the crossings of the 
Big STRANGER creek. 


(3) (a) The advance guard will clear D at 5-15 A. M., marching 
via the E—G—Arcuison PikE—1—74—78—80—Q—R—EastTon road. 
Patrols will be sent via LowEemMonr to reconnoiter the crossings of 
the Bia StraNGER near MiLLtwoop and via Mount OLIvErT to recon- 
noiter those near 114. | 

(b) The main body will follow at a distance of about 700 yards. 
(4) The baggage train (less that of the 3d Inf.), escorted by 
one squad, 2d Inf., will start from D at 6-15 A. M. and follow to 
P where it will await further orders. 
(5) Reports will reach the brigade commander at the head of 
By command of Brig.-Gen. X: 

Y, 
Adit. Gene 


the main body. 


OFFICERS’ RESERVE CORPS 199 


Copies by Adjutant to Col. B. 1st Inf. 
Col. C. 2d Inf. 
Col. D. 3d Inf. 
Maj. A. Ist Inf. 
Capt. E. Tr. A 7th Cav. 
Capt. F. Hospital Corps. 


GENERAL IDEAS AND RULES FOR SOLVING 
MILITARY PROBLEMS 

The cave man knocked over his foe with a rude club. 
The operation is greatly refined to-day. The technique 
of war changes with the ages, but human nature remains 
the same. Whether with grenade or gas, from sub- 
marine or aéroplane, a man after all possible woe and 
suffering is no more than killed. Human nature will 
submit to losses in battle up to a certain point, after 
that the frailties are asserted. The instinct of self- 
preservation dominates. Organization and discipline 
and reason are dissipated. A condition ensues similar 
to that which we have in theaters during fires. 

Napoleon’s success as a military leader was due to 
his knowledge of men and how to handle them, common 
sense, and in a lesser degree to what he learned from 
books. Upon such a basis the young managers of in- 
dustrial concerns would be most valuable material from 
which to select and train successful military leaders. 
They know men, and it is necessary to possess a world 
of common sense to acquire any such knowledge. 
Many of those elements that make success in a military 
man are exactly the same as those that make a man 
successful anywhere. A president of a university, a 


200 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


lawyer or banker or merchant or engineer, has exactly 
the same kind of daily problems to solve, and requires 
much the same talents as those possessed by a military 
leader. 

Since success in battle is the thing at which we are 
driving in all military training, it is common sense to 
prepare a machine that will do the business. Every 
officer and noncommissioned officer has got to know how 
to play the game. A good private makes a good cor- 
poral, a good corporal makes a good sergeant, a good 
a good colonel makes 


sergeant makes a good lieutenant 
a good brigadier general—all exactly as in civil life. 

Prussia has had her greatest military success when 
she devoted her energies to manceuvers and to the solu- 
tion of tactical problems. Her defeats and humilia- 
tions have come when she has neglected this work. 
And there ’s nothing mysterious about the way Prussia 
or Napoleon or anybody else has solved their military 
problems. No occult forces are involved, any more 
than there is in building a canal or hunting tigers. The 
real general is, in a sense, a postgraduate hunter, or an . 
advanced, all-American quarterback. 

One phase of the military work is significant and 
should cause reflection. ‘The punishment for errors in 
war is very severe. A leader who makes mistakes may 
not only pay for them with his own blood but others too 
may suffer with him. In war we must obey our leaders 
whether they are right or wrong. How great, do you 
suppose, are those hordes that have been sacrificed 


OFFICERS’ RESERVE CORPS 201 


on history’s battlefields to the goddess of ignorance? 

Napoleon says in one of his maxims, “Read and re- 
read the campaigns of Alexander, Cesar, Gustavus 
Adolphus, 'Turrenne, Eugene, and Frederick; take them 
for your model; that is the only way of becoming a great 
captain, to obtain the secrets of the art of war.” To 
read more intelligently such history we should know 
something about solving problems in minor tactics. 
We must know how to solve such problems if we are to 
master our duties as officers. 

Whether, as general or corporal, you are solving a 
problem on a map or on the ground, your methods will 
be, in principle, the same. In the former case your 
soldiers understand thoroughly all orders and do ex- 
actly as directed. In the latter case your soldiers are 
human. They get tired and sick. ‘They go in the 
wrong directions and get lost sometimes. One forgets, 
another is late, and the third misinterprets an order, ete. _ 

Here is the common-sense way in which an all-Ameri- 
can quarterback performs his duties. He studies care- 
fully the opposing team (enemy) by reports before- 
hand and on the field of the contest, to determine his 
weak and strong points. The latter he wishes to avoid 
in directing his attack. He considers his position on 
the field, the wind and weather, if raining, etc., and then 
his different plays to hit the weaker parts of the oppos- 
ing line with the advantages and disadvantages of each. 
To his well-trained mind all this is done in a flash, but 
the logic and causes and effects of action are none the 


202 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


less present. ‘This quarterback has analyzed the con- 
ditions of his problems, he has figured out what he is up 
against; that is to say, he has estimated the situation. 

He is now ready for a decision. He determines 
where he is going to strike and with what kind of a play 
he will do it. 

He gives a signal, 44—11—17—5. That is to say, 
he issues his orders. 

That is exactly the way a military man, whether he 
be a corporal or a general, goes about handling a prob- 
lem, whether on paper or on the ground. When he 
goes into battle he finds the only difference is that the 
problem is complicated by bullets and excitement. 

Don’t think that you are going to learn to solve prob- 
lems from books alone, any more than you can learn 
to play tennis or build bridges on paper. You have 
got to get out into the country and work with actual 
troops. But first study map problems. Come to a 
decision slowly until you have had considerable practice, 
then write out your order with no guides or references. 
Then check yourself up. Common sense and simple 
plans are the safest guides. 

To frame a suitable field order you must make an 
estimate of the situation, culminating in a decision upon 
a definite plan of action. You must then actually draft 
or word the orders which will carry your decision into 
effect. 


OFFICERS’ RESERVE CORPS 203 


THE LOGICAL WAY TO ESTIMATE THE SITUATION 


Ist. Consider exactly what you are to do, i.e., your 
mission as set forth in the orders or instructions under 
which you are acting or as deduced by you from your 
knowledge of the situation. 

2d. Consider all available information of the enemy. 
What is his strength? How is he situated? What is 
he going to do? ete. 

3d. Consider all conditions affecting your own troops. 
What advantages in numbers and position have you 
over the enemy? What is their morale? ete. 

4th. Consider the terrain in so far as it affects the 
situation. 

5th. Consider the various plans of action open to you 
and decide upon the one that will best enable you to 
accomplish your mission (carry out your task) ; that is 
to say, come to a decision. 

It is now necessary to express that decision in the 
form of an order as the quarterback did in giving the 
signal, 44—11—17—5. 

To enable the will of the commander to be quickly 
understood, and to secure prompt codperation among 
his subordinates, field orders are required to follow a 
general form. 

Under the stress and strain of an engagement there 
are many causes of excitement. Unless we have trained 
ourselves to act along certain lines in issuing orders, 
we may forget some important considerations. We 


204 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


have known people of superb intelligence to do poorly 
before a large audience simply from lack of training 
and experience. 


CORRECT PROCEDURE IN GIVING THE MAIN PART 
OF A FIELD ORDER 


1st. Give the information of the enemy and of our 
own supporting troops (1.e., those who may come to our 
assistance in case of need) to your subordinates that will 
give them a clear understanding of the problem and 
enable them intelligently to codperate with you. 

2d. Now state what you are going to do. ‘That is to 
say, give your plan. 

3d. Next, how you are going to put that plan into 
effect. ‘That is, the assignment of duties to each sub- 
ordinate. | 

4th. Give instructions for the ammunition trains, 
stations for the slightly wounded, ete. 

5th. State where you can be found or where messages 
may be sent. 


SOME GENERAL HINTS 


Clear and decisive orders are the logical result of 
definite and sure decisions. ‘To gage a man’s caliber 
read his orders. 

You must not be hazy and indefinite in your order. 
You must be clear and definite. Be careful about your 
phrasing and expressions. An order should be like a 
cablegram: convey every idea but contain no unneces- 
sary words. 


OFFICERS’ RESERVE CORPS 205 


Don’t break up the squads or platoons or the com- 
panies. Keep the tactical units together as much as 
possible. 

It is marvelous how many mistakes can occur on the 
battlefield. Attempt a complicated plan and its failure 
is reasonably assured. Have your plan simple. The 
enveloping attack is the best. That is to say, have your 
line longer than the enemy’s so that you can attack one 
of his flanks. He knows this quite as well as you and 
he will endeavor to perform the same operation upon 
you. The leader, all else being equal, who has the 
wit to out-manceuver the other will win the engage- 
ment. 

As a rule, an affirmative form of expression is used. 
Such an order as: “The supply train will not accom- 
pany the division,” is defective, because the gist of the 
order depends upon the single word “not.” 

Write your order so it can be read. Don’t go about 
it as though you were a doctor writing a prescription. 
Things will go wrong if you do. You will find some 
of your troops moving in the wrong direction when you 
need them badly. 

Be brief. Short sentences are good. ‘They are 
clear. Conjectures, expectations, and _reasons for 
measures adopted are weak. ‘They do not inspire con- 
fidence. ‘They should be avoided. 

Accept the entire responsibility of your command. 
If things go wrong, it’s your fault. Correct them. <A 
large number of military men make it their particular 


206 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


business to find faults in others, with scarcely a thought 
for their own. Don’t join this club. Reverse the mat- 
ters 

Avoid such expressions as “attempt to capture,” “try 
to hold,” “as far as possible, 
Tell a man what he is todo. Don’t divide any responsi- 


be Saat $5 


as well as you can,” ete. 


bility with any one. 

Officers and men of all ranks and grades are given 
a certain independence in the execution of the tasks to 
which they are assigned and are expected to show initia- 
tive in meeting the different situations as they arise. 
Every individual, from the highest commander to the 
lowest private, must always remember that inaction and 
neglect of opportunities will warrant severe censure. 
Do something that will help carry out the plans of your 
commander. The Japanese regulations caution their 
commanders to avoid inaction and hesitation. 

If you were hunting tigers and permitted a wounded 
one to move to your rear and spring upon you, unaware 
of its presence, you would probably pay a heavy price 
for not being on the alert. For a military leader to be 
caught unawares is unpardonable. 

Napoleon said in another of his maxims: “If the 
enemy’s army were to appear on my front, or on my 
right or left, what would I do?” If the question is dif- 
ficult for the commander to answer, his troops are not 
only poorly placed but are poorly led. 

Don’t let your force be divided up into detachments 
and roam all over the country. ‘This is a very common 


OFFICERS’ RESERVE CORPS 207 


error with beginners. Avoid dispersion. Keep your 
troops together. 

You cannot fire on the battlefield with the same ac- 
curacy as you do on the target range. Fear dilates the 
pupil of the eye. Men cannot shoot well when they are 
under great excitement. Don’t count on killing too 
many of the enemy with a carload of ammunition. 

Never forget that Fire Superiority is the thing that 
wins battles. If you let the other fellow get it and keep 
it, he’s going to win, not you. ) 

Don’t trespass upon the province of a subordinate. 
He will handle his job if you will handle yours. 

Remember that your flanks are just as vulnerable 
as the enemy’s. He has his eyes on your flanks just as 
much as you are observing and considering his own. 

Keep cool about starting the action. Don’t put all 
your men in before you understand thoroughly the con- 
dition confronting you. Hold a large part of your 
force out as supports and reserves until you know defi- 
nitely the enemy’s position. 

Don’t get killed unless necessary; your usefulness to 
the State comes to an end when that occurs. Take 
advantage of cover, hug the ground. Learn what is 
good and what is poor cover. 

It is a common fault to forget about the service of 
information once the action has begun. Keep up your 
patroling. Keep yourself posted on what the enemy is 
about. Otherwise he may have some unpleasant sur- 
prise for you. 


208 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


Be particularly careful about details of time and 
place. Regulate your watch by the time kept at head- 
quarters. 

When you ’ve got the enemy on the run don’t let up 
for an instant. Pursue him without mercy. Turn his 
retreat into a rout. Capture or destroy his forces. 

Scarcely any of these things we are telling you are 
new. ‘They are as old as war itself. The boxer of a 
thousand years from now may know a little more about 
the technique of the game, but the essentials will not 
change. ‘To wear the champion’s belt, he will have to 
suffer some lusty blows and be able himself to deliver 
some more powerful. ‘There will be no easy road to 
the title. So it is with all wars. 


SUMMARY 


We recommend that each officer become familiar with 
the following summary: 

“1, Avoid combats that offer no chance of victory or 
other valuable results. 

“2. Make every effort for the success of the general 
plan and avoid spectacular plays that have no bearing on 
the general result. 

“3. Have a definite plan and carry it out vigorously. 
Do not vacillate. 

“4. Do not attempt complicated manceuvers. 

“5. Keep the command in hand; avoid undue exten- 
sion and dispersion. , 

“6. Study the ground and direct the advance in such 


OFFICERS’ RESERVE CORPS 209 


a way as to take advantage of all available cover and 
thereby diminish losses. 

“7. Never deploy until the purpose and the proper 
direction are known. 

“8. Deploy enough men for the immediate task in 
hand; hold out the rest and avoid undue haste in com- 
mitting them to the action. 

“9. Flanks must be protected either by reserves, for- 
tifications, or the terrain. 

“10. In a decisive action, gain and keep fire superi- 
ority. 

“11. Keep up reconnaissance. 

“12. Use the reserve, but not until needed or a very 
favorable opportunity for its use presents itself. Keep 
some reserve as long as practicable. 

“13. Do not hesitate to sacrifice the command if the 
result is worth the cost. 

“14, Spare the command all unnecessary hardship 
and exertion.” 

—Infantry Drill Regulations. 


aT 


Ly ‘a 


SUPPLEMENT 
ADVANCE WORK 


SUPPLEMENT 
CHAPTER I 
THE THEORY OF SECURITY 
(Copied from the Field Service Regulations) 


GENERAL PRINCIPLES 


Security embraces all those measures taken by a com- 
mand to protect itself from observation, annoyance, or 
surprise by the enemy. 

Ordinarily this security is provided in part by cavalry. 
But as a command is not always preceded by cavalry, 
and as this cavalry can not always prevent sudden in- 
cursions of the enemy or discover his patrols, additional 
security becomes necessary. ‘This is obtained by cover- 
ing the immediate front of the command with detach- 
ments. 

On the march these detachments are called advance, 
flank, or rear guards; in camp or bivouac they are called 
outposts. 

The object of the former is to facilitate the movement 
of the main body and to protect it from surprise and 
observation; the object of the latter is to secure the 
camp or bivouae against surprise and to prevent an at- 


tack upon it before the troops can prepare to resist. 
213 


214 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


On the march these detachments facilitate the advance 
of the main body by promptly driving off small bodies 
of the enemy who seek to harass or delay it; by remov- 
ing obstacles from the line of advance; by repairing 
roads, bridges, etc., thus enabling the main body to ad- 
vance uninterruptedly in convenient marching forma- 
tions. 

They protect the main body by preventing the enemy 
from firing into it when in close formation; by holding 
the enemy and enabling the main body to deploy before 
coming under effective fire; by preventing its size and 
condition being observed by the enemy; and, in retreat, 
by gaining time for it to make its escape or to reorganize 
its forces. 

As the principal duty of these bodies is the same, 
viz., that of protecting the main body, there is a general 
similarity in the formations assumed by them. There is 
(1) the cavalry covering the front; next, (2) a group, 
or line of groups, in observation; then (3) the support, 
or line of supports, whose duty is to furnish the observa- 
tion groups, and check the enemy pending the arrival 
of reinforcements; still farther in rear is (4) the reserve. 

An advance or flank guard commander marches well 
to the front, and, from time to time, orders such addi- 
tional reconnaissance or makes such changes in his dis- 
positions as the circumstances of the case demand. 

In large commands troops from all arms are generally 
detailed, the proportion from each being determined by 
the tactical situation; but commanders detail no more 


THE THEORY OF SECURITY 215 
troops than the situation actually requires, as an exces- 
sive amount of such duty rapidly impairs the efficiency 
of acommand. Asa general rule troops detailed on the 
service of security vary in strength from one twentieth 
to one third of the entire command, but seldom exceed 
the latter. When practicable, the integrity of tactical 
units is preserved. 

In mixed commands infantry usually forms the 
greater part of the troops detailed to the service of se- 
curity. Cavalry is assigned to that duty whenever ad- 
vantage can be taken of its superior mobility. The 
kind and amount of artillery are determined by circum- 
stances. 

The field trains of troops on this duty generally re- 
main with the field train of the command, but if condi- 
tions permit they may join their organizations. 

Troops on the service of security pay no compliments; 
individuals salute when they address, or are addressed 
by, a superior officer. 


ADVANCE GUARDS 


An advance guard is a detachment of the main body 
which precedes and covers it on the march. 

Its duties are: 

(1) To guard against surprise and furnish informa- 
tion by reconnoitering to the front and flanks. 

(2) To push back small parties of the enemy and pre- 
vent their observing, firing upon, or delaying the main 
body. 


216 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


(3) To check the enemy’s advance in force long 
enough to permit the main body to prepare for action. 

(4) When the enemy is encountered on the defensive, 
to seize a good position and locate his lines, care bemg 
taken not to bring on a general engagement unless the 
advance-guard commander is empowered to do so. 

(5) To remove obstacles, repair the road, and favor 
in every way possible the steady march of the column. 


STRENGTH AND COMPOSITION 


Subject to variation according to the situation, one 
twentieth to one third of a command may be assumed 
as a suitable strength for the advance guard. The 
larger the force, the larger in proportion is the advance 
guard, for a large command takes relatively longer to 
prepare for action than a small one. In large com- 
mands it is usually composed of all arms, the propor- 
tions depending on the nature of the work, character of 
the country, ete. 


DISTANCE FROM THE MAIN BODY 


While the distance between these two bodies should 
be great enough to prevent needless interruptions in 
the march of the main body, and to give the latter time 
to deploy should the enemy be encountered, it should 
never be so great that timely support of the advance 
guard becomes impracticable. 


PLATE SHOWING “IDEAS INVOLVED 1M» ADVANCE GUARD 


As you Go trom the point to the main body note that the distances 
are greater as the groups become larger. Larger groups require 
more time and space, when getting ready tor action, than 
small groups. A very important thing to remember in connection 
with this platé 1s that you have only such groyps in an advance 
guard as are necessary to insure protection tor the man 


Lod, 
é 8 Poirrt 
| 
“ 
Patrols here if Aavance Foro hae 
Party 
NECCESSATY NCCESSATY 
! 
af 
| 
5S upport 
| 
) 
x 
! 
| 
! 
Such patrols on each Reserve  UCh patrols on each 
flank as conditions tlank as conditions 
make necessary make necessary 
i 
| 
{ 
Ww 
{ 
i 
| 
Patrols if necessary Main Patrols If necessary 
Body 


217 


218 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


DISTRIBUTION OF TROOPS 

An advance-guard order generally prescribes the fol- 
lowing distribution of troops: 

Advance cavalry. 

Support. 

Reserve. 

The manner in which the advance-guard cavalry is 
employed depends upon the situation. Its proper place 
is in the direction of the enemy, and generally all or the 
greater part is used as advance cavalry. If weak in 
numbers, it may be assigned to the support. 


ADVANCE CAVALRY 
The advance cavalry is that part of the advance-guard 
cavalry preceding the support. It reconnoiters far 
enough to the front and flanks to guard the column 
against surprise by artillery fire, and to enable timely in- 
formation to be sent to the advance-guard commander. 


SUPPORT 
Following the advance cavalry is the support, varying 
in strength from one fourth to one half of the advance 
guard. In mixed commands it consists of infantry, to 
which engineers may be attached. If there is no ad- 
vance cavalry, some cavalry should be attached to the 
support for reconnoitering duty. 
As the support moves out it sends forward an ad- 
vance party several hundred yards, the distance varying 
with the terrain and the size of the command. 


THE THEORY OF SECURITY 219 

The advance party supplements the work of the ad- 
vance cavalry, reconnoitering to the front and flanks to 
guard the support against surprise by effective rifle fire. 
The patrol preceding the advance party on the line of 
march is called the point, and is commanded by an offi- 
cer or an experienced noncommissioned officer. 

With the advance cavalry in front but little recon- 
noitering by infantry is necessary, and the advance party 
is relatively small—one eighth to one third of the sup- 
port. If there is no advance cavalry, the advance party 
is made stronger (about one half of the support) and 
the flanks are guarded, if necessary, by additional pa- 
trols sent out from the support and even from the re- 
serve. | 
The support commander ordinarily marches with the 
advance party, but goes wherever needed. He sees that 
the proper road is followed; that guides are left in towns 
and at crossroads; that necessary repairs are made to 
roads, bridges, etc., and that information of the enemy 
or affecting the march is promptly transmitted to the ad- 
vance-guard commander. He endeavors promptly to 
verify information of the enemy. 


. RESERVE 


The reserve follows the support at several hundred 
yards’ distance. It consists of the remainder of the in- 
fantry and engineers, the artillery, and the ambulance 
company. The artillery usually marches near the head 


220 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


of the reserve, the engineers (with bridge train, if any) 
and special troops at the rear. 


RECON NAISSAN CE 


In conducting the reconnaissance the patrols are, as 
a rule, small—from two'to six men. If additional pro- 
tection is necessary, a flank guard covers the threatened 
flank. The flanking patrols, whether of the advance 
cavalry or advance party, are sent out to examine the 
country wherever the enemy might be concealed. If 
the nature of the terrain permits, these patrols march 
across country or along roads and trails paralleling the 
march of the column. For cavalry patrols this is often 
possible; but with infantry patrols and even with those 
that are mounted, reconnaissance is generally ‘best done 
by sending the patrols to high places along the line of 
march to overlook the country and examine the danger 
points. These patrols report or signal the results of 
their observations and, unless they have other instruc- 
_ tions, join their units by the most practicable routes, 
other patrols being sent out as the march proceeds and 
as the nature of the country required. 

Deserters, suspicious characters, and bearers of flags 
of truce, the latter blindfolded, are taken to the advance- 
guard commander. 

Civilians are not permitted to precede the advance 
guard. 

Communication between the fractions of an advance 


THE THEORY OF SECURITY 221 


guard and between the advance guard and main body is 
maintained by wire, messenger service, or signals. 


ADVANCE GUARD OF A SMALL COMMAND 


In forming the advance guard of a command smaller 
than a brigade, the foregoing distribution is modified, 
depending upon the situation. A company or troop 
usually sends forward only a point, a battalion or squad- 
ron, an advance party; but a battalion or squadron at 
war strength should put a company or troop in the ad- 
vance guard and a regiment should put a battalion or 
squadron, if an enemy is liable to be met. Whenever 
the advance guard is less than a battalion, there is no re- 
serve. 

REAR GUARDS 


The rear guard is charged with the important duty of 
covering the retreat. 

When a commander decides to retreat, he issues the 
necessary order. During a retreat the outpost for the 
night usually forms the rear guard of the following day. 


STRENGTH AND COMPOSITION 


The strength of a rear guard depends upon the nature 
of the country and the strength and character of the pur- 
suing force. It can not, like the advance guard, count 
on the support of the main body. 

Machine guns are especially useful in the passage of 
defiles and in covering the crossings of rivers. 


222 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


Engineers and ambulance companies are usually as- 
signed to rear guards. 

The troops of a rear guard are selected from those 
that have had previous local successes, or have suffered 
little loss and are comparatively fresh. 


DISTRIBUTION OF TROOPS 


The proximity and conduct of the enemy control, to 

a large extent, the formation of a rear guard. When 
it is not necessary to withdraw in deployed lines, the 
greater part of the rear guard marches on the road in 
column of route, taking up a formation resembling that 
of an advanced guard faced to the rear. The distribu- 
tion of troops is therefore similar to that of an advance 
guard, namely: 


Reserve. 
Support. 
Rear cavalry. 


The rear cavalry is that portion of the rear-guard 
cavalry following the support. The support, as in an 
advance guard, is divided into two parts; that part near- 
est the enemy is called the rear party and marches with 
a rear point. 


DISTANCES 


The distance of the rear guard from the main body 
and between the fractions of the rear guard are about 
the same as in the case of an advance guard. If march- 
ing at night, the rear guard draws nearer the main body. 


THE THEORY OF SECURITY 223 


REAR GUARD OF AN ADVANCING FORCE 


If there is a possibility that the rear of the column may 
be attacked, a rear guard of suitable strength and com- 
position is provided. Its conduct is practically the same 
as that of the rear guard of a retreating force. It gen- 
erally marches in rear of the trains, those organizations 
following the combatant troops without distance. 


OUTPOSTS 


The size and disposition of the outpost will depend 
upon many circumstances, such as the size of the whole 
command, the proximity of the enemy and the situation 
with respect to him, the nature of the terrain, ete. 

A suitable strength may vary from a very small frac- 
tion to one third of the whole force. For a single com- 
pany in bivouac a few sentinels and patrols will suffice; 
for a large command a more elaborate outpost system 
must be provided. It should be no stronger than is 
consistent with reasonable security. 

The most economical protection is furnished by keep- 
ing close contact with the enemy by means of outpost 
patrols, in conjunction with resisting detachments on 
the avenues of approach. 

The outpost should-be composed of complete organi- 
zations. 

The positions held by the subdivisions of the outpost 
should generally be prepared for defense, but conditions 
may render this unnecessary. 

Troops on outpost keep concealed as much as is con- 


224 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


sistent with the proper performance of their duties; es- 
pecially do they avoid appearing on the sky line. 


COM POSITION 


A mixed outpost is composed principally of infantry. 
The infantry is charged with the duty of local observa- 
tion, especially at night and with resisting the enemy 
long enough for the main body to prepare for action. 
The cavalry is charged with the duty of reconnaissance, 
and is very useful in open country during the day. 

If the infantry has been severely taxed by marching 
or fighting, a large part of the outpost may be tem- 
porarily formed of cavalry. 

Artillery is useful to outposts when its fire can sweep 
defiles or large open spaces and when it commands po- 
sitions that might be occupied by hostile artillery. The 
guns are carefully concealed or protected and are usually 
withdrawn at night. 

Machine guns are useful to command approaches and 
check sudden advances of the enemy. 

The field trains of troops on outpost duty generally 
join their organizations; if an engagement is probable, 
they may be held in rear. 


DISTRIBUTION OF OUTPOST TROOPS 


The outpost will generally be divided into four parts. 
These, in order from the main body, are the reserve, the 
line of supports, the line of outguards, and the advance 
cavalry. 


THE THEORY OF SECURITY 225 


PLATE SHOWING ™IDEAS INVOLVED IN «» OUTPOST 


Cavalry 
Cavalry Cavalry 
oe = 188 Pap oa 
es Line ; of OW Fares | HH ine Picket 
AgG at * H ex \ / Pas / ; / ff “PAL Sentry Squad 
oot \ me No.1 Support No 4-Support \ } 4 1b /) ~sq_Cassack Post 
i ; No 2 Support No 3 Support H ff wit S 
X. \ Nas Shaner epee, otis — No B soppccs / a, 
Boe ae ne of Supports . Usua/ ee fr on 
~~ No.4. Supporr~ | \ ve % f/f ~~ No 1’ Support 
Ne | / \ : cg 
pom \ | / \ | vA Baer 
AD. AS oibe sf LS ae Peg ak 
sn \ / \ ee TE 
S, pe ee ee ar 4 oe 
as i Vat ge os 
vee of Rese 
No 2 Reserve Uta ——~— Yves fl No / Reserve 
rae z \ f oe es 
\Distances in all/ cases 
It is irmportart to great enough to permit 
note that this Magram groups to prepare for 
1s fer general 1Ae@s attacks in case the 
These rust be moditied Group in front 1s fired 
to suit every particular ae \ / 
case Suagment solves \ / 
the problem. are ard \ / 
experience help _yvagment a7 
ee 
Mountains and broad MAIN Thick forests and impassible 
body of water on this 1. «6 Swarmps on this flank_ Ver, 
flank Small patrols Booby small patrols will afford 
will afford proper proper security 


SECUrI ty 


The distance separating these parts, and their dis- 
tance from the main body, will depend upon the object 
sought, the nature of the terrain, and the size of the com- 
mand. ‘There can be no uniformity in the distance be- 
tween supports and reserve, nor between outguards and 
supports, even in the same outpost. The avenues of 


226 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


approach and the important features of the terrain will 
largely contro] their exact positions. 

The outpost of a small force should ordinarily hold the 
enemy beyond effective rifle range of the main body 
until the latter can deploy. For the same purpose the - 
outpost of a large force should hold the enemy beyond 
the artillery range. 

The reserve constitutes the main body of the outpost 
and is held at some central point from which it can read- 
wy support the troops in front or hold a rallying position 
on which they may retire. The reserve may be omitted 
when the outpost consists of less than two compa- 
nies. 

The reserve may comprise one-fourth to two-thirds 
of the strength of the outpost. 

The supports constitute a line of resisting and sup- 
porting detachments, varying in size from a half com- 
pany toa battalion. They furnish the line of outguards. 

The supports are numbered consecutively from right 
to left. They are placed at the more important points 
on the outpost line, usually in the line on which resistance 
is to be made in case of attack. 

As a general rule, roads exercise the greatest influ- 
ence on the location of supports, and a support will gen- 
erally be placed on or near a road. ‘The section which 
it is to cover should be clearly defined by means of tangi- 
ble lines on the ground and should be such that the sup- 
port is centrally located therein. 

The outguards constitute the line of small detach- 


THE THEORY OF SECURITY 227 


ments farthest to the front and nearest to the enemy. 
For convenience they are classified as pickets, sentry 
squads, and cossack posts. ‘They are numbered con- 
secutively from right to left in each support. 

A picket is a group consisting of two or more squads, 
ordinarily not exceeding half a company, posted in the 
line of outguards to cover a given sector. It furnishes 
patrols and one or more sentinels, double sentinels, 
sentry squads, or cossack posts for observation. 

Pickets are placed at the more important points in 
_ the line of outguards, such as road forks. The strength 
of each depends upon the number of small groups re- 
quired to observe properly its sector. 

A sentry squad is a squad posted in observation at an 
indicated point. It posts a double sentinel in observa- 
tion, the remaining men resting near by and furnishing 
the reliefs of sentinels. In some cases it may be required 
to furnish a patrol. 

A cossack post consists of four men. It is an ob- 
servation group similar to a sentry squad, but employs 
a single sentinel. 

At night it will sometimes be advisable to place some 
of the outguards or their sentinels in a position different 
from that which they occupy in the day time. In such 
case the ground should be carefully studied before dark 
and the change made at dusk. However, a change in 
the position of the outguard will be exceptional. 

Sentinels are generally used singly in daytime, but at 
night double sentinels will be required in most cases. 


228 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


Sentinels furnished by cossack posts or sentry squads 
are kept near their group. ‘Those furnished by pickets 
may be as far as 100 yards away. 

Every sentinel should be able to communicate readily 
with the body to which he belongs. 

Sentinel posts are numbered consecutively from right ° 
to left in each outguard. Sentry squads and cossack 
posts furnished by pickets are counted as sentinel posts. 

By day, cavalry reconnoiters in advance of the line of 
observation. At night, however, that the horses may 
have needed rest and because the work can be done bet- 
ter by infantry, the greater part of the cavalry is usually 
withdrawn in rear of the supports, generally joining the 
reserve, small detachments being assigned to the sup- 
ports for patrolling at a distance. 

With efficient cavalry in front, the work of the in- 
fantry on the line of observation is reduced to a mini- 
mum. 

General instructions for the advance cavalry are given 
by the outpost commander, but details are left to the 
subordinate. 

Instead of using outguards along the entire front of 
observation, part of this front may be covered by patrols 
only. ‘These should be used to cover such sections of 
the front as can be crossed by the enemy only with dif- 
ficulty and over which he is not likely to attempt a cross- 
ing after dark. . 

In daylight much of the local patrolling may be dis- 
pensed with if the country can be seen from the posts of 


THE THEORY OF SECURITY 229 


the sentinels. However, patrols should frequently be 
pushed well to the front unless the ground in that direc- 
tion is exceptionally open. 

Patrols or sentinels must be the first troops which the 
enemy meets, and each body in rear must have time to 
prepare for the blow. ‘These bodies cause as much de- 
lay as possible without sacrificing themselves, and grad- 
ually retire to the line where the outpost is to make its 
resistance. 

Patrols must be used to keep up connection between 
the parts of the outpost except when, during daylight, 
certain fractions or groups are mutually visible. After 
dark this connection must be maintained throughout the 
outpost except where the larger subdivisions are pro- 
vided with wire communication. 

In addition to ordinary outguards, the outpost com- 
mander may detail from the reserve one or more de- 
tached posts to cover roads or areas not in the general 
line assigned to the supports. 

In like manner the commander of the whole force may 
order detached posts to be sent from the main body to 
cover important roads or localities not included in the 
outpost line. 

The number and strength of detached posts are re- 
duced to the absolute needs of the situation. 


ESTABLISHING THE OUTPOST 


The outpost is posted as quickly as possible, so that 
the troops can the sooner obtain rest. Until the lead- 


230 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


ing outpost troops are able to assume their duties, tem- 
porary protection, known as the march outpost, is fur- 
nished by the nearest available troops. 

The halt order of the commander, besides giving the 
necessary information and assigning camp sites to the 
parts of the command, details the troops to constitute 
the outpost, assigns a commander therefor, designates 
the general line to be occupied, and, when practicable, 
points out the position to be held in case of attack. 

The outpost commander, upon receipt of this order, 
should issue the outpost order with the least practicable 
delay. In large commands it may often be necessary to 
give the order from the map, but usually the outpost 
commander will have to make some preliminary recon- 
naissance, unless he has an accurate and detailed map. 

The order gives such available information of the 
situation as is necessary to the complete and proper 
guidance of subordinates; designates the troops to con- 
stitute the supports; assigns their location.and the sector 
each is to cover; provides for the necessary detached 
posts; indicates any special reconnaissance that is to be 
made; orders the location and disposition of the reserve; 
disposes of the train if same is ordered to join the out- 
post; and informs subordinates where information will 
be sent. 

After issuing the initial orders, the outpost comman- 
der inspects the outpost, orders the necessary changes 
or additions, and sends his superior a report of his dis- 
positions. 


; THE THEORY OF SECURITY 231 


The reserve is marched to its post by its commander, 
who then sends out such detachments as have been or- 
dered and places the rest in camp or bivouac, over which 
at least one sentinel should be posted. Connection must 
be maintained with the main body, the supports, and 
nearby detached posts. 

The supports march to their posts, using the neces- 
sary covering detachments when in advance of the march 
outpost. A support commander’s order should fully 
explain the situation to subordinates, or to the entire 
command, if it be small. It should detail the troops 
for the different outguards and, when necessary, define 
the sector each is to cover. It should provide the neces- 
sary sentinels at the post of support, the patrols to be 
sent therefrom, and should arrange for the necessary 
intrenching. Connection should be maintained with the 
adjoining supports and with the outguards furnished by 
the supports. 

In posting his command the support commander must 
seek to cover his sector in such manner that the enemy 
cannot reach, in dangerous numbers and unobserved, the 
position of the support or pass by it within the sector 
intrusted to the support. On the other hand, he must 
economize men on observation and patrol duty, for these 
duties are unusually fatiguing. He must practise the 
greatest economy of men consistent with the require- 
ments of practical security. 

As soon as the posting of the support is completed, 
its commander carefully inspects the dispositions and 


232 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


corrects defects, if any, and reports the disposition of 
his support, including the patrolling ordered, to the out- 
post commander. ‘This report is preferably made by 
means of a sketch. 

Each outguard is marched by its commander to its 
assigned station, and especially in the case of a picket, 
is covered by the necessary patrolling to prevent sur- 
prise. 

Having reached the position, the commander explains 
the situation to his men and establishes reliefs for each 
sentinel, and, if possible, for each patrol to be furnished. 
Besides these sentinels and patrols, a picket must have 
a sentinel at its post. 

The commander then posts the sentinels and points 
out to them the principal features, such as towns, roads, 
and streams and gives their names. He gives the direc- 
tion and location of the enemy, if known, and of adjoin- 
ing parts of the outpost. 

He gives to patrols the same information and the nec- 
essary orders as to their routes and the frequency with 
which the same shall be covered. ach patrol should 
go over its route once before dark. 

Every picket should maintain connection by patrols - 
with outguard on its right and left. Each commander 
will take precaution to conceal his outguard and will 
generally strengthen his position by intrenching. 


THE THEORY OF SECURITY 233 


RELIEVING THE OUTPOST 

Evening and shortly before dawn are hours of special 
danger. ‘The enemy may attack late in the day in or- 
der to establish himself on captured ground by intrench- 
ing during the night; or he may send forward troops 
under cover of darkness in order to make a strong attack 
at early dawn. Special precaution is therefore taken 
at those hours by holding the outpost in readiness, and 
by sending patrols in advance of the line of observation. 
If a new outpost is to be established in the morning, it 
should arrive at the outpost position at daybreak, thus 
doubling the outpost strength at that hour. 


CHAPTER II 


ATTACK AND DEFENSE 


Combat is divided into two general classes, the of- 
fensive (attack) and the defensive. 


THE THEORY OF ATTACK 


Decisive results are obtained only by the offensive. 
Aggressiveness wins battles. If you want to thrash a 
man go after him; don’t wait for him to come to you. 
When attacking use every available man. Have every 
man in the proper place at the proper time and in a 
physical and moral condition to do his utmost. 


ADVANTAGES OF THE ATTACK 


(1) You can elect the point of attack while the de- 
fender must be prepared to resist at all points. 

(2) The fact that you are advancing in spite of the 
defender’s fire stimulates you and depresses the enemy. 

(3) You leave your dead behind while the defender 
must fight among his fallen comrades, which is demor- 
alizing. 

(4) You usually are conscious of the fact that you 
have more men on your side than the defender. You 


have more rifles on the line than the enemy. 
234 


ATTACK AND DEFENSE 235 

(5) Your fire is usually more efficacious than that of 
your opponent because it is usually converging while 
his is diverging. 

These advantages alone will not necessarily insure 
success, but fire superiority, if gained and maintained, 
does insure success. By gaining and maintaining fire 
superiority you remove all doubt as to the final outcome 
of the attack. 


DIFFERENT KINDS OF ATTACK 


The most usual kinds of attack are: 

Frontal Attack. ‘This attack is delivered directly 
against the front of the enemy. It offers little oppor- 
tunity to bring more rifles against the enemy than he 
can bring against you. Decisive results can only be 
expected when your force is larger than your opponent’s 
or when his is unduly extended. It is a dangerous and 
costly method of attacking. 

Enveloping Attack. Cover the front of the enemy 
with sufficient force to hold his attention and, with the 
rest of your command, strike a flank more or less 
obliquely. Since your line is now longer than his, and 
you have more rifles in action your fire is converging 
while that of your enemy is diverging. Never attempt 
the envelopment of both flanks unless you greatly out- 
number your enemy. Codperation between the frontal 
and enveloping attack is essential to success. 'The frac- 
tion of the command that envelops the enemy is gener- 
ally larger than that part in his front. A wide turning 


236 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


movement is not an enveloping movement. It is dan- 
gerous because your troops are separated and can be de- 
feated in detail. In an enveloping movement your line 
will usually be continuous; it simply overlaps and en- 
velops the enemy. An enveloping attack will nearly 
always result locally in a frontal attack, for it will meet 
the enemy’s reserve. Let ws repeat: do not attempt a 
wide turning movement. Your forces will be separated, 
they may not be able to assist each other, and can be de- 
feated in detail. The tendency of a beginner is to at- 
tempt a wide turning movement. The error of dispersion 
ig then committed. 


THE ACTUAL ATTACK 


Deployment. ‘To deploy means to extend the front. 
When does a column extend its front or prepare to 
fight? When open terrain, which will probably expose 
the troops to hostile artillery fire, is reached. ‘This place 
may be two or more miles from the enemy. What is 
done? Strong patrols are sent out to clear the fore- 
ground of the enemy’s patrol. The plan of the attack 
is inaugurated. Extra ammunition is issued. Each or- 
ganization is assigned its task. The organizations in 
the firing lines are assigned objectives and move out, 
followed by local supports and reserves. Don’t under- 
stand that they go “as skirmishers.” They usually 
march in column of squads. Strong combat patrols are 
sent out to protect each flank. This is very important 
even with small commands. 


ATTACK AND DEFENSE 237 


ADVANCING THE ATTACK 


It is now necessary to advance the attack to a point 
where the rifle is effective, so the attacking line can gain 
fire superiority. The attack which halts to open fire 
at extreme range (over 1200 yards) is not likely to ever 
reach its destination (the enemy). Effort should be 
made to arrive within 800 yards of the enemy before 
opening fire. How can this be done? How can we 
pass over a mile or more of ground, swept or likely to 
be swept, first by the enemy’s artillery fire and finally 
by rifle fire? Answer.—By using all the cover the ter- 
rain offers (escape the enemy’s view), by using incon- 
spicuous formations, by using such formations as to min- 
imize the effect of the enemy’s fire. Discipline at this 
stage of the attack is essential. Hach company in the 
firing line will probably start its advance upon its ob- 
jective in column of squads, but taking advantage of all 
cover. If thick underbrush is found, squad columns 
would probably be used. If the enemy’s artillery fire 
becomes too effective platoon columns or thin lines 
are used, dependent upon terrain, cover and the time 
element. Every opportunity is taken to assemble the 
companies and continue the advance in column of squads 
when cover is available. The supports, following the 
firing line, adopt the same methods to advance as the 
firing line. In this stage of the attack your own ar- 
tillery will be assisting you by replying to the enemy’s 
artillery and infantry fire that is directed at you. 


238 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


THE FIRE ATTACK 


The fire attack commences when the infantry in the 
firmg line first opens fire and it usually ends with the 
charge. A charge is sometimes not necessary because 
the enemy withdraws from his position. The fire at- 
tack does not start until the firing line cannot advance 
without ruinous and demoralizing losses. It should not 
be over 1200 yards from the enemy. At this time fire 
superiority must be gained. ‘This may necessitate a 
steady, accurate fire for many hours. Jor this purpose 
the commander puts more men on the firing line than 
the enemy and then some more if necessary. Local sup- 
ports are used if required. Having gained fire superi- 
ority, the advance by rushes commences, but each rush 
must leave behind or have in front of it enough rifles to 
maintain fire superiority. This determines the size of 
the rush. You cannot lose this fire superiority and ad- 
vance; and once it is lost, hours may be required to re- 
gain it. The number of men in each rush will usually 
decrease as the enemy’s position 1s approached. If the 
firing line is stopped, if fire superiority is lost and can- 
not be regained, the firing line intrenches and holds on 
until darkness or until a favorable turn in the situation 
develops. It is suicidal to turn back. During the ad- 
vance, supports move up as close to the firing line as 
cover will permit, adopting those formations best suited 
to keep down losses. ‘They may be as close as fifty 
yards to the firing line. ‘They should not be as far as 
500 yards in rear of it. 


ATTACK AND DEFENSE 239 


THE CHARGE 


There can be no rule to tell you when to charge. It 
may be from 25 to 400 yards. ‘The common sense (tac- 
tical instinct) of the senior ranking officer on the firing 
line must tell him the psychological moment to order the 
charge. ‘That moment will be when your fire has broken 
down the enemy’s fire, broken his resistance, and de- 
stroyed his morale. ‘The artillery increases its range. 
The firing line and remaining supports fix bayonets. 
The former increases the rate of fire, the latter rush for- 
ward under the protection of this fire, join the firing 
line and give it the necessary impetus. ‘Together they 
rush at the enemy’s position. No restraint is placed 
upon their ardor. Confidence in their ability to use the 
bayonet gives the charging troops the promise of suc- 
cess. If the charge is successful, the nearest formed 
bodies are sent instantly in pursuit and under cover of 
them the commands are reorganized, order restored, and 
arrangements made to resist a counter attack. If the 
charge is unsuccessful the artillery or any formed troops 
in rear cover the withdrawal. 


THE THEORY OF THE DEFENSIVE 


The defensive is divided into the purely passive de- 
fense and the active defense. 

The passive defense seeks merely to delay the enemy. 
The results can never be other than negative. It is 
usually for the purpose of gaining time and most fre- 


240 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


quently used by a rear guard. Since the idea of taking 
up the offensive is absent, no strong reserves are held out 
for a counter attack; the firing line is as strong as pos- 
sible from the first; every advantage is taken of ob- 
stacles, natural or artificial. ‘The flanks must be made 
secure. 

The active defense seeks to attack the other side at: 
some stage of the engagement. It seeks to win and 
only the offensive wins. . It is often necessary for a com- 
mander to assume the defensive (active) either volun- 
tarily, in order to gain time, or to secure some advan- 
tage over the enemy; or involuntarily, as in a meeting 
engagement where the enemy gets a start in deployment 
for action or where the enemy’s attack is impetuous and 
without sufficient preparation. In either case the de- 
fensive force contents itself with parrying the blows of 
the enemy, while gathering and arranging its strength, 
looking and waiting for the right place and time to de- 
liver a decisive blow which is called the counter attack. 
Hence, a counter attack is the offensive movement of an 
active defense. Its success greatly depends on being 
delivered with vigor and at the proper time. It may be 
delivered in two ways: Ist—straight to the front 
against a weak point in the attacking line, or 2nd—by 
launching the reserves against the enemy’s flank after 
he is fully committed to the attack. The latter method 
offers the greatest chances for success and the most ef- 
fective results. 


EE ————— —— 


ATTACK AND DEFENSE 241 


ADVANTAGES AND DISADVANTAGES OF THE DEFENSIVE 


The defense has the following advantages over the 
attack: 

(1) Troops attacking afford a better target than the 
troops on the defensive. 

(2) A larger amount of ammunition is_ usually 
available. 

(3) The men can shoot better because they are not 
fatigued by advancing. 

(4) Losses will be less if good cover is secured. 


DISADVANTAGES OF THE DEFENSE 


(1) The defender surrenders the advantage of the 


initiative as the attacker can elect the point of attack 


and the defender must be prepared at all points. 

(2) The defender must fight amidst his dead and 
wounded which is depressing. 

(3) The defender, seeing the enemy continually ad- 
vancing, becomes conscious of his inability to stop him. 
This is depressing to the defender and is injurious to his 
morale. 


REQUISITES OF A GOOD DEFENSIVE POSITION 


If you were looking for a good defensive position. 
what points would you have in mind and of these points, 
which would be the most important? 'The requisites to 
be sought in a good defensive position are: 

“(1) A clear field of fire up to the effective range 
of the artillery. 


24.2 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


“(2) Flanks that are naturally secure or that can be 
made so by the use of the reserves. 

“(3) Extent of ground suitable to the strength of 
the force to occupy it. 

“(4) Effective cover and concealment for the troops, 
especially reserves. ak 

(5) Good communications throughout the position. 

“(6) Good lines of retreat.” 

—Ficld Service Regulations. 

All of these advantages will seldom if ever be found 
in the position selected. The one should be taken 
which conforms closest to the description, but you 
should bear in mind that a good field of fire and effective 
cover, in the order named, are the most important 
requisites. In tracing the lines for the trenches, avoid 
salients (a hill, spur, woods, etc., that juts out from the 
general line in the direction of the enemy). Avoid 
placing the fire trench on the skyline. Locate it on or 
below the military crest. [The crest from which you 
can see all the ground to the front. | 


PREPARING A DEFENSIVE POSITION 


Now let us suppose ourselves as part of a battalion 
that is to occupy a defensive position. What would 
probably be done? How and in what order would it 
be done? What would the major do? He would de- 
cide upon the kind of defense (active or passive) to 
offer, and then find a suitable defensive position in har- 
mony with his plans. He would determine exactly 


ATTACK AND DEFENSE 243 


where the firing and other trenches are to be dug. He 
would then call up the company commanders and issue 
his defense order in which the task of each company 
would be made clear. ‘Those to occupy the firing line 
would each be assigned a sector of ground to the front 
to defend and a corresponding section of the fire trench 
to construct. The supports would construct their 
trenches and the communicating trenches. He would, 
if necessary, issue the necessary orders to protect the 
front and flanks by sending out patrols. He would in- 
dicate how the position is to be strengthened and make 
arrangements for distributing the extra ammunition. 
If time is a serious consideration, the major would direct 
the work to be done in the order of its importance, which 
is ordinarily as follows: 

(1) Clearing of foreground to improve the field of 
fire and construction of fire trench. 

(2) Head or overhead cover concealment. 

(3) Placing obstacles and recording ranges. 

(4) Cover trenches for supports and local reserves. 

(5) Communicating trenches. 

(6) Widening and deepening of trench; interior con- 
veniences. 

Now having cleared the foreground, dug the trenches, 
recorded ranges to the important objects in each sector, 
etc., the position can be occupied. The citizen ordina- 
rily pictures the firing trench full of soldiers when he is 
told the trenches are occupied. Notso. Patrols would 
be operating well to the front to give timely warning to 


244 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


one or two sentinels in each company fire trench of the 
approach of the enemy. ‘These sentinels would in turn 
inform the company which would probably be resting in 
the trenches in the rear. 


THE ACTUAL DEFENSE 


Let us suppose now that our battalion, occupying this 
defensive position, is a part of a larger force which is 
supported by artillery. You see small objects one and 
a half to two miles to your front. You know they are 
the enemy’s troops because your artillery is firing at 
them and your combat patrols are being driven in. 
Your entire company has moved to its fire trench. You 
have plenty of ammunition, you know exactly the range. 
What happens? You open fire on the enemy at prob- 
ably the extreme range of 2000 yards. Only the hostile 
artillery can return this fire until the enemy’s firing 
line closes to within 1200 yards of your position. 
While an attacking force is thus approaching you 
may inflict very serious losses upon it. But it can- 
not stop, however serious its losses, beyond 1200 yards; 
for we have seen that, if it stops advancing in order 
to fire, it will probably never arrive at your posi- 
tion. When within 1200 yards the enemy will build 
up a strong rifle fire against you and not attempt to ad- 
vance until he has gained fire superiority. It is your 
business not to let him get fire superiority, and if he 
does do so to take it away from him when he withdraws 
parts of his rifles to advance by rushing. Fight each 


ATTACK AND DEFENSE 245 


rush. If your defense is active and you permanently 
stop the enemy’s advance by gaining fire superiority, 
and he cannot regain it, even though he uses up his sup- 
ports, his firing line will become confused and demora- 
lized and it will be the psychological time for the proper 
commander to launch his counter attack. On the other 
hand, if you cannot stop his advance, fix bayonets (fir- 
ing line and remaining supports) when he fixes bayonets 
and meet his charge in front of your trench. All your 
supports will be moved up to assist you in opposing the 
charge. If you are unsuccessful in the bayonet fight 
or forced to retire from your trenches during the fire 
fight your artillery, cavalry and any formed reserves in 
the rear will cover your withdrawal, which, if possible, 
should be made straight to the rear, one part covering 
the withdrawal of the other part, and soon. Reorganize 
at the first opportunity. 


CHAPTER III 


PATROLLING 


Everything else being equal the army that possesses 
the most accurate information about the enemy will win. 
Military history recites the fact that almost every im- 
portant battle has been either lost or won because of 
information or lack of information that one side had 
or did not have of the other side. It is by the use 
of patrols that the most valuable information of the 
enemy is usually obtained. 

There are many kinds of patrols, but it is with recon- 
noitering or information seeking patrols that this chap- 
ter deals. 


DUTIES OF A PATROL 


Each reconnoitering patrol is given a certain mission 
(duty) to perform. The name, “reconnoitering,”’ mean- 
ing to survey, to view, indicates that its first duty is to 
get information, and information is always greatly in- 
creased in value if the enemy does not know it has been 
obtained. Having obtained valuable information, its 
next duty is to send this information to the officer send- 


ing out the patrol. 
246 


PATROLLING 247 


STRENGTH 


The strength of the patrol will generally depend on its 
mission and on the number of messages that it will prob- 
ably send back. ‘The larger the patrol the greater the 
probability of the enemy seeing it. On the other hand, 
if it is too small, it will not have sufficient members to 
send in important information and continue operations. 
Captain Waldron in his book, “Scouting and Patrol- 
ling,’ recommends a patrol of a leader and six selected 
men for ordinary reconnaissance. This number makes 
it possible for the patrol leader to place a man out on 
each flank, a man in advance, two to remain with him 
and one to remain in the rear as the get-away man. The 
officer who sends out the patrol determines its strength. 


COMMANDER 


The leader should be an officer or a noncommissioned 
officer. He must have good judgment, be cool, be 
quick in making a decision, be strong in physique, have 
initiative, and be brave, but not to the extent of rash- 
ness. Besides his regular equipment he should have 
a good pair of field glasses, a compass, a watch, wire 
cutters, pencils, a message book, and a map of the 
country. 


INSTRUCTIONS 


The officer sending out a patrol should give it instruc- 
tions on the following points: 


248 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


1. Information of the enemy and of friendly support- 
ing troops. 

2. The mission of the patrol. This will include the 
general direction in which it is to go. 

3. How long the patrol is to remain out. 

4. Where messages are to be sent. 


PREPARATION 


Before going out the patrol commander will make a 
careful inspection of the members of his patrol in order 
to see: 

1. That the members are in a suitable condition for 
the duty to be performed. (Not drunk, sick, lame, hay- 
ing a bad cough, etc.) 

2. That each man is properly armed and has the 
requisite amount of ammunition. 

3. That the accoutrement is so arranged that it will 
not rattle or glisten in the sunlight. 

4. That no man has anything about him that will af- 
ford the enemy valuable information in the event of cap- 
Ture 

At the conclusion of this inspection he will, in the 
presence of the officer sending out the patrol, go over 
his orders, giving his men all the information that he 
has of the enemy and his own troops; state the duty 
(mission) of the patrol so that all may know what they 
are going to accomplish, and he will follow this with a 
statement of his general plan for carrying it out. He 
will designate an assembly point should the patrol be 


PATROLLING 249 


dispersed. He will designate a second in command 


should he be disabled. 


FORMATION 


It is impossible to lay down any hard-and-fast rule 
governing the formation and conduct of the operations 
of a patrol. Each situation will have to be worked out 
by itself. The patrol should assume the general forma- 
tion of a column of troops on the march; that is, it will 


Small 


we Sie 7 


g in 


=== 
; FAN 
G7) 


ez 
2, 


L 
an 
AN 


Lard 


9 Men Going 6 Men Going 
Across Country | Across Country 


@ Patrol Leader 
Leading Man 
eo) Get-away Man 


© Spare Man 


SUGGESTED FORMATIONS FOR PATROLS 


250 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


have an advance guard, a main body, flankers and a rear 
guard. ‘These several elements may each be repre- 
sented by only one man. 


CONDUCT OF THE PATROL 


In communicating with each other for ordinary pur- 
poses the members of the patrol use signals agreed upon 
before the start. For this purpose each man must con- 
stantly keep within sight and hearing distance of the 
leader.- A patrol moves cautiously, taking advantage 
of all available cover, seeking in every way to see with- 
out being seen. It halts frequently to listen and make 
careful observations of its surroundings. E:xcept at 
night a patrol should not move on roads. Villages and 
inbabited places should not as a rule be entered. Dur- 
ing the daytime it seeks high ground from which it can 
scan the country and at night it seeks a position from 
which the sky line can be observed. 


ENCOUNTERING THE ENEMY 


If a small hostile patrol is encountered it is generally 
better to remain in concealment and let it pass than to 
attack. The noise of a fight may be heard by the en- 
emy, the presence of the patrol therefore indicated, and 
the enemy will take further precautions to oppose its 
operations. If the patrol is suddenly attacked or sur- 
prised by a superior force, the patrol should at once 
scatter in all directions and the members make their 
way back to the last place designated as a meeting place 


PATROLLING 251 


and then after reuniting continue the reconnaissance. 
When a patrol fights it does so resolutely. Courage 
and coolness may bring about success when adverse con- 
ditions are encountered. 


RETURNING 


A patrol can never be certain that the enemy’s patrols 
are not operating in its rear. Hence in returning, it is 
necessary to observe the usual precautions. If the pa- 
trol has eluded the enemy, it is best to return over a 
route other than that over which the start was made. 
If a patrol, after having accomplished its mission, 1s 
being pursued, it is well, especially when near its own 
lines, to engage the pursuing troops so as to give warn- 
ing of its approach to the outpost line. Under the 
conditions just mentioned, except the patrol is a great 
distance from its outpost line, it may be necessary as 
a last resort to have the patrol scatter and each man 
return individually. 


CHAPTER IV 


TARGET PRACTICE 


Military shooting or target practice is very different 
from shotgun shooting, or even the kind of shooting re- 
quired of a large-game hunter; therefore we should 
begin with the most elementary instruction and drills, 
if proficiency is to be obtained. Our “Small Arms 
Firing Regulations” says, “The sole purpose of rifle 
training for the soldier is to make of him a good shot 
under war conditions.” | 

Proficient shots are made off the range and not on it. 
By this we mean that the preliminary instruction you 
will receive before you go on the range will be of more 
benefit to you than the actual firing for record. Indeed, 
firing on the range will only test your ability to put into 
use the many points covered by your preliminary in- 
struction. ‘Therefore, if you are to become a proficient 
shot, maintain your interest and enthusiasm at its highest 
pitch during the preliminary instruction. 

The short time allotted to preliminary instruction and 
rifle practice at a training camp of one month’s duration 
is barely sufficient to cover hastily a few of the prelimi- 
nary drills and to allow each man to fire over an in- 
struction or record course. ‘This chapter will first ex- 


plain briefly the purpose of each preliminary drill, and 
252 


TARGET PRACTICE 2538 


then give the essential things to be remembered when 
actually firing on the range. 


PRELIMINARY INSTRUCTION 


Your preliminary instruction due to the limited 
amount of time available will probably be as follows: 

1. Nomenclature of the Rifle. The word nomencla- | 
ture means the vocabulary: of names or technical terms 
which are appropriate to any particular topic. In this 
case the topic is the rifle. This instruction will be a few 
lectures or talks by your company officers on the rifle. 
You should become familiar with the parts of the rifle 
indicated in the following illustration: 


Safety Lock 


Rear Sight Leaf 
Pe 2A Stock 
———— 


Front Sight 
eC 
Sef Muzzle 


= a Fn = Bayonet Stud 
Bolt Handle Lower Band Stacking Swivel 


Butt : 
_ Trigger Guard 
Toe 
2. Sighting Drills. 
Purpose. , 


(a) To explain the different kinds of sight. 

(b) ‘To show how to align the sights properly on 
the bull’s-eye. 

(c) To discover and demonstrate errors in sighting. 

(d) To teach uniformity in sighting. 


054 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


There are two kinds of sights on the rear sight leaf, 
the open and peep sight. ‘The open sight is the semi- 
circular notch a-b-c shown in the diagram below; the 
peep sight is the small hole ‘“d” just below the oper 


sight. 


a, b, c—open sight 
d—peep sight 


The sighting drills will visually illustrate the follow- 
ing kind of sights. 

a—Normal Sight. 'This is the sight most frequently 
used. The following illustration is the normal sight 
when the open sight notch is used. 


The figure 
i-k-I-m is the 
front sight 
B-L-M-C the rear 


sight notch. 


TARGET PRACTICE 255 


When the open sight is used the above diagram shows 
the correct alignments of the rear sight notch, front 
sight and the bull’s-eye. The following features 
should be. noticed: 

Ist. The front sight (i-k-l-m) is exactly in the 
center of the rear sight notch (B-L-M-C), if it is in 
the right or left part of this notch the rifle will shoot to 
the right or left of the point aimed at. 

2d. ‘There is a thin strip of white seen between the 
top of the front sight and the bull’s-eye. (The Marine 
Corps and many army officers do not see this strip of 
white. ‘The method of aiming given and illustrated in 
this book is the same as found in the I‘iring Regulations 
for the Army.) 

3d. ‘The top of the front sight should just touch an 
imaginary line connecting the shoulder at C with that 
at B. (This is most important.) 

4th. The aim is taken at the bottom of the bull’s-eye 
and not at the top or center. 

b—Fine Sight. The following illustration shows a 
fine sight which should never be used: 


256 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


This sight causes the rifle to shoot too low because 
not enough front sight is seen. Correspondingly, if 
more front sight is seen than illustrated in the normal 
sights, the rifle shoots high. 

c—Normal Sight. The following illustration shows 
the normal sight when the peep sight is ‘used. 


The above illustration shows the correct alignment of 
the peep sight, front sight, and the bull’s-eye. The fol- 
lowing features should be noticed: 

Ist. The top of the front sight and not the bull’s-eye 
is focused in the center of the peep sight. 

2d. There is a thin strip of white between the top 
of the front sight and the bottom of the bull’s-eye. 

3. Position and Aiming Drills. 

Purpose: ‘To so educate the muscles of the arms 
and body that the gun, during the act of aiming, shall 
be held without restraint and during the operation of 


TARGET PRACTICE 257 


firing shall not be deflected from the target by any con- 
vulsion or improper movement of the trigger finger or 
of the body, arms or hands. These drills were not 
given at Plattsburg in 1916 on account of the limited 
amount of time available. If you are enthusiastic about 
- rifle shooting, and these drills are not given to you, ask 
your company commander to show them to you, as they 
can be executed to advantage at odd times. 

4. Deflection and Elevation Correction Drills. 

Purpose. ‘To show you how to raise or lower your 
rear sight, change your windage to the right or left, 
and the effect on the striking point of the bullet in each 
case. In general terms these drills teach you: 

(1) What to do when you are firing too high or low. 
(Elevation Drill.) 

(2) What to do when you are firing to the right or 
left of the target. (Deflection Drill.) 

The assumption is in each case that the gun is 
properly aimed the instant it is fired. 

Thoroughly to grasp every phase of the Elevation and 
Deflection Drills, it is best that you become familiarized 
with the dimensions of the following targets and the 
ranges at which each is used. It is not intended that 
you shall retain all these figures in your mind. 


b> 
Or 


58 THE: PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


SLOW FIRE TARGETS 


i 
! 
on 
k--- £6" — -» 
TARGET A 


nn-- mm oe 


This target is used during slow fire at 200 and 300 
yards. 


53" ---n 


oe — — 


- TARGET B 


This target is used during slow fire at 500 and 600 
yards. 


TARGET PRACTICE 259 


RAPID FIRE TARGET 


- 


— — — — 8S = ee 
ate “+19 da 


po —_-—--- 
44 me DD 


This target is always used with the battle sight at 
200, 300, and 500 yards rapid fire. Battle sight is the 
position of the rear sight when the leaf is laid down, 
which is the habitual position of the rear sight leaf at 
drill. It is an open sight, and corresponds to an eleva- 
tion of 547 yards. 


WINDAGE 


The rear sight is set on a movable base so that it can 
be moved to the right or left and the aiming point 
shifted accordingly in order to counteract the effect of 
the wind on the bullet. 

General Rule. To shift the striking point of the 
bullet to the left move the rear sight to the left. And, 
of course, the reverse holds true when it is moved to the 
right. 

A Specific Rule. One point of windage moves the 


260 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


striking point of the bullet 4 inches for every 100 yards 
you are distant from the target. (One point of wind- 
age at 200 yards causes the bullet to strike 8 inches to 
the right or left of the line of aim; one point at 300 
yards causes a 12-inch deflection of the bullet; one point 
at 500 yards a 20-inch deflection, and so on.) 


ELEVATION 


General rule for changing the elevation after hitting 
the target: A change of elevation either up or down, 
of 100 yards on your rear sight, will raise or lower your 
bullet in inches on the target equal to the square of your 
distance in yards from the target. Il.e., a change of 
100 yards in elevation on the rear sight leaf while firing 
at the 200-yard range raises or lowers the striking point 
of the bullet at the target 4 inches. A similar change 
while firing at the 300-yard range raises or lowers the 
striking point of the bullet 9 inches, at the 400-yard 
range it would be 16 inches, at the 500-yard range 25 
inches, and so on. 

The following illustrations are self-explanatory in 
regard to windage and elevation changes and should be 
diligently studied during preliminary instruction. ‘The 
effect of windage changes (given in points) will be 
found at the bottom of each target, while the effect of 
elevation-changes (given in yards)’ will be found to the 
left of each target. , 


TARGET PRACTICE 261 


x 


zs 


UTAL 


d ...0clock -.Miles Wind -.-Oclock -. Miles 
(ETL, eR Os ae ae eet (REL pyar ora ap 
' Wind Gauge --- nae Wind Gauge: . - 
vent Se eee Ss aie eal VET a ens aioeele ane Svewiem'e 


‘600 YARDS Sp 
< S 

: as ras 

Fre 

el 

Zia 

eee 

6] 

Ee 

ope 

} 1 L 35 | oa 

rE bgt pee sO 


Wind : rep 
: pee OCLOCK  EIMIlES MIRAGE. 5. 
ROGET gn ete oe 


DIRECTION OF BUN din en ag ww omy <a operons 
75 


TARGET B, 6'x6’ 
The above system of indicating the windage and 
elevation on each target is used in the United States 
Marine Corps score book. Each man at Plattsburg, in 
1916, was supplied with one of these score books. If 
used at the firing point they greatly simplify sight ad- 
justments, besides containing other very useful informa- 
tion on shooting. 


262 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


5. Gallery Practice. Purpose. 

1. To note errors in the position of the man while 
he is in the act of firing and call his attention to them 
after he has fired. 

2. To give instruction in squeezing the trigger 
properly. 

3. To stimulate and maintain interest. 

4. Offers a check on what the man has absorbed 
from the other preliminary drills. 

Fire just as much on the gallery range as your com- 
pany commander will permit. You cannot fire too 
much. Every shot you fire should teach you a lesson 
on some point connected with the art of shooting. 


SLOW FIRE 


Following satisfactory gallery practice scores the 
men go on the range for known distance practice. Here 
the army rifle is fired with service charges at known 
ranges; first, for instruction, if time permits, and then 
for record. To obtain satisfactory results the firer 
must perform correctly five essential things, namely: 

1. Hold the rifle on the mark. 

2, Aim properly. 

3. Squeeze the trigger properly. 

4, Call the shot. 

5. Make the proper sight adjustment. 

They will be briefly and separately discussed: 

1. Holding. Unless the rifle is held steadily the 
bullet will not hit the desired mark. ‘The firer must be 


TARGET PRACTICE 263 


able to hold the rifle steadily in the three positions, 
kneeling, sitting, lying down. Holding is a question of 
the proper body position, use of the sling, and practice. 

Body Position. The position of the firer must be 
comfortable. You may, at first, feel constrained or 
-eramped in the different positions but by continued 
practice the muscles and joints will become so supple 
and pliable that you can easily assume the correct posi- 
tion. Each man who is trying for a high score should 
utilize all available time to this end. The following 
photographs illustrate the correct and incorrect posi- 
tions: 


NO mits Notice. the 
position of the elbows. 
They are advanced past 
the knees so that the flat 
muscles on the back of 
the arms, above the el- 
bows, rest against the — 
legs. Notice the position — No. 1 
of the right thumb and CORRECT SITTING POSITION 
aiming eye; also sling. To assume this position cor- 
rectly, it is necessary that you lean well forward. 
Avoid the tendency of getting the feet too far apart. 


264 


No. 2. 


CORRECT SITTING POSITION 


Noe. 


THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


No. 2. “Notice the 
proper manner of 
working the bolt dur- 
ing rapid fire. Keep 
your gun at the shoul- 
der loading. 
Turn the gun to right 
and down a little. 
Don’t make any un- 
necessary motions. 


while 


INCORRECT SITTING POSITION 


No. 1. Left elbow is 
resting on knee cap. No 
support to steady right 
arm. Eye too far from 
rear sight. Lip is against 
stock. (This causes sore 
lips.) Thumb around 
stock. Sling on outside 
of arm. 


No. 2. This shows the 


common error of lowering 
the gun from the shoulder 
to load it during rapid 
fire. 


——— CU loo cccr—<—C ee 


.=——_  — _ = 


TARGET PRACTICE 


Correct kneeling 
Notice that the 


INGE 1. 
position. 
back of the left arm (not 
elbow) is resting on knee. 
(It would be a better posi- 
tion if the right knee was 


pointing a little more to the 


right in this illustration. ) 


Neo, 1; 


No. 1. Thumb is around 
small of stock. Kye too 
far from rear sight. ‘The 
gun is turned (canted) to 
the right. ‘Ihe sharp 
point of the elbow is rest- 
ing on the knee which has 
a tendency to make the 
position an unsteady one. 


once 


No,. 2. 


INCORRECT KNEELING POSITION 


No. »2. ‘The improper 
manner of loading the gun 
during rapid fire. He has 
lowered the gun from his 
shoulder to load it, which 
is “a time-killing” propo- 
sition. 


THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


266 


‘quIny} JYSIL Jo UOT}TS 

-od ao1}0N “Aap[noys oy} 

ysurese passaid st uns 9t} 

‘{nO pIUIN} 918 $30} 9U} ‘Ie Joy ayy ALEYAA 99190. N ‘uns dU} 

yvy} AON ‘pof pue ysurese Sur[s ay} Jo j1nssaid = tapun [fa st WB 4JoT Oty 

sSay oy} Jo uorptsod yal 943 soON “wae yjo, Jo UI ayoN ‘afd JYSIL 
-109 34} DION “EG ‘ON uoryisod a010N °% ‘ON ou} sN0N ‘LT ‘ON 


NOILISOd HNOUd LOWUUOO 


3 
4 
ad 
4 
i 
: 
3 


267 


TARGET PRACTICE 


Bop 
ay} 0} poystay st Apog, 
‘uoytsod ssdoidut ue 
ul a18 SSa'T + ‘“G ‘ON 


‘uns Japun [aM 70U 
MOG[a eT “FSI 0} 
poyueo unr) ‘JYSIeV.1}s 
you ssayT ‘*%Z ‘ON 


NOILISOd ANOUd LOXUUOONI 


‘goaId JYSIS vat WOIJ 
rej 00} aAW ‘Aapun [aM 
you MOQ]a 4jo"y = “SIT aaos 
pue sasiniq Jo asneo 9} 
SI Yor Yyooys jo [[Buls 
ssoloew st quiny} yYSNy 
‘ULIB OY} JO spisyno 9} 
uO SI SUITS “YYSII ayy 0} 
poyued sE uNX) “TT ‘ON 


268 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


Sling. Your ability to hold the rifle steadily in any 
required position will be greatly increased by the proper 
adjustment and use of the sling. Indeed, you cannot 
hope to hold the rifle steadily unless the sling is prop- 
erly used. ‘The following photographs illustrate the 
correct way to get into the sling. 


No. 1. Notice that the left arm 
is slipped in between the sling and the 
gun from the left side. It is then run 
through the sling from the right side 
of same. Notice how gun is held 
against leg. Notice that the muzzle 
of the gun is pointing up, not down. 
The bolt should be drawn back while 
you get into the sling. This is to 
avoid accidents. Notice that the sight 
leaf is down. 


TARGET PRACTICE 269 


No. 2. Notice that the sling 
has been slipped up and over the 
large muscles of the upper arm. 
Also the left hand after being 
run through the sling is grasp- 
ing the gun so that the sling is 
to the right. 

By turning back now to the 
photographs illustrating the cor- 
rect body positions you will see 
how the sling is used. 

2. Aiming. An error of one 


one-hundredth of an inch in the AS 


amount of front sight seen, at the instant the gun is 
fired, will cause you to completely miss a man 500 yards 
away. Hence, the eye must be trained unless the firer 
has at all times a mental picture of how the sights and 
the bull’s-eye look when properly aligned. You should 
acquire this mental picture during your aiming exercises 
and by the time you go on the range you should have 
the eye so trained that you will focus it properly on your 
sights and the target without mental effort. 

8. Trigger Squeeze. If you convulsively jerk the 
trigger to discharge the rifle, you disturb your hold and 
aim and the mark is missed; this is the recruit’s most 
common error. 'To properly squeeze trigger observe 
the following suggestions: 


270 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


(a) As you place your rifle to the shoulder, take up 
the loose play in the trigger (called the creep). 

(b) When the gun is properly aimed, don’t endeavor 
at that particular moment to fire it but be content to 
apply additional pressure to the trigger and then hold 
this pressure until the gun is again steady and properly 
aimed when a little more pressure is added and so on 
until the gun is discharged. By using this system, the 
firer does not know the exact instant the gun is to go off 
and the common faults, namely, flinching and jerking 
the trigger are unconsciously avoided. 

(c) Fill lungs full, that is take a deep breath, let a 
little out, and then stop breathing to fire. 

4. Calling the Shot. If the aiming eye is open when 
the gun is discharged, the firer should know at what 
part of the target the gun was aimed at that instant, and 
he should announce this fact to his coach or in the 
absence of a coach make a mental note of it. If the 
bullet struck the target at the point where the gun was 
aimed the instant of discharge, no sight correction is 
necessary; on the other hand, if the bullet did not strike 
the target at the point where the gun was aimed the 
instant of discharge, the sights are probably improperly. 
adjusted and should be changed as indicated in the 
following paragraph on sight adjustment. 

5. Sight Adjustment. If, after firing two or more 
shots, you find that, in each case, there is a constant 
error between where the bullet hits the target and the ~ 
place where you called the shot, your sights should be 


TARGET PRACTICE 271 


readjusted in accordance with your preliminary eleva- 
tion and deflection drills. When you decide to change 
your sight adjustment don’t be timid and deal in half 
measures but apply a sufficient correction so that the 
rifle will hit where the shot is called. The ineaperienced 
man has a tendency to change his sights after each shot. 
Avoid this tendency. 


RAPID FIRE 

In rapid fire the battle sight is always used; the firing 
is against time and at a field target (‘Target D), and 
from ranges 200, 300, and sometimes 500 yards. 

The battle sight corresponds to an elevation of 547 
yards, which makes it necessary for the firer at the 200 
and 300 yard ranges to aim at a point about 2% feet 
below the part of the target that it is desired to hit. 
Prior to record firing each man should determine these 
aiming points by slow fire, at ranges 200 and 300 yards, 
using the battle sight. 

There is one golden rule that must be followed if you 
are to get a good score at rapid fire: Yow must use 
the minimum time possible in loading and the maximum . 
time possible for aiming and squeezing the trigger. To 
be more specific, this means work your bolt quickly but 
aim and squeeze your trigger slowly. 


HINTS ON RAPID FIRE 
1. When you go to the firing point get two clips of 
cartridges, one to be used at the command load and the 
extra one is placed in the belt. 


oF 


272 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


2 See that your cut-off is up. 

3. When the target first appears drop quickly into 
the required position for firing. A great deal of time 
is usually lost by the firer squirming around trying to 
get into a comfortable position. 

4. Don’t hurry your first or last shot. These are 
the two shots that are usually bad. 

5. If your second clip jams or breaks, turn the 
cut-off up, load and fire each cartridge separately. 

6. Leave the gun at your shoulder while working the 
bolt. 

7. Be careful to fire on your own target. 

8. If a cartridge fails to fire, it is very probably be- 
cause the bolt is not all the way down; therefore recock 
the gun (pull the firing pin back), make certain the bolt 
is down, and fire again. 

9. As soon as the targets disappear cease firing, come 
to Inspection Arms, examine your rifle for unfired 
cartridges. 


GENERAL HINTS AND CAUTIONS 


1. Don’t be afraid of the kick; it is more imaginary 
than real when the sling is properly used, your shoulder 
properly padded, and the gun properly held. 

2. Rest your cheek, not your jaw bone, lightly against 
the small of the stock. 

3. Rest your right thumb along the right side of the 

stock and not on top of it. 


TARGET PRACTICE 273 


4. Blacken both front and rear sights, adjust and 
place your arm in the sling, and if possible set your 
sights while you are waiting your turn to go to the firing 
point. 

5. Approach and leave the firing point with your bolt 
drawn back. ‘This is to prevent accidents. 

6. When not actually aiming, have your bolt drawn 
back. 

7. Never attempt to force the bolt into the gun in 
case of a jam, but ask a coach to fix it for you. 

8. Don’t allow the muzzle to touch the ground. 

9. Don’t rub your eyes while at the firing point. 

10. When not actually aiming, rest the eyes by shad- 
ing them or looking at something green. 

11. Clean the bore of your rifle before and after fir- 
ing. After firing it should be cleaned daily, until a 
rag run through it will not be soiled. 

12. Clean the rifle from the breech. 

13. Zero of rifle. Every rifle, owing to slight in- 
equalities of boring, sights, and the personal errors of 
the firer, shoots differently. When you have ascertained 
its (rifle) and your own peculiar errors and you know 
where to set your sights to counteract these constant 
errors, you have determined what is commonly termed 
the zero of your rifle. ‘To illustrate, if you were shoot- 
ing on a perfectly calm day (which is essential) at the 
target from the 500-yard range, and you found that you 
required one half a point left windage in order to hit 


274 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


the bull’s-eye when no wind is blowing, the zero of your 
rifle for that range would be one half a point left wind- 


uge. 


CARE’ OF THE RIFLE 


Keep the metal part of your rifle covered with a thin 
coating of light oil; “3-in-1” oil is ordinarily used. 
This is especially important in damp weather. 

Always clean the bore from the breech. ‘This avoids 
injuring the muzzle. ‘The pull through (a string found 
in the oiler and thong case) is only used in the field. 

After the rifle is fired the bore is covered with an acid 
which, if left in the bore, will eat into the metal and pit 
it. To avoid this, swab out the barrel as soon as pos- 
sible after firmg with Hoppe’s “Powder Solvent, No. 
9” which can be purchased at the camp stores. If this 
powder solvent is not available, dissolve some soda in 
water and use it. When the barrel is clean, dry it out 
thoroughly by running several dry rags through it. 
Next run several rags, saturated in oil, through the 
barrel, this for the purpose of oiling the bore and pre- 
venting rust. This process of cleaning should be re- 
peated for at least three successive days following the 
firing of the rifle. 

The metal fouling, caused by the pealing off in the 
bore of the jacket of the bullet, can only be removed 
by an application of an ammonia solution which should 
not be used by an inexperienced man. 


TARGET PRACTICE 275 


MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION 


The Bayonet. ‘The bayonet is a cutting and thrust- 
ing weapon consisting of three principal parts, viz., the 
blade, the guard, and the grip. The weight of a 
bayonet is 1 pound. 

1 
Bn nn. ae caer seems nF ee een tee nee tao ames ans 


| ous ee ee, 


GE 


ets. 


Lieut. B. A. Dixon, 9th Infantry, has compiled the 
following interesting data about our military rifle and 
ammunition : 


“Name. United States Rifle (commonly known as 
the Springfield). 

“Cost. $14.40 without the bayonet. 

“Barrel. 24.006 inches in length. The muzzle is 
rounded to protect the rifling. Any injury here would 
allow gases to escape around the sides of the bullet and 
destroy its accuracy. 

“On the top in rear of the front sight is stamped the 
Ordnance escutcheon, the initials of the place of manu- 
facture, and the month and year. 

“Caliber. .80-thirty hundredths of an inch. Caliber 


276 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


is the interior diameter of the barrel measured between 
the lands. 

“Grooves. 'The four spiral channels within the bore 
of the rifle sometimes called rifling. They are .004 
inches deep and are three times as wide as the lands. 

“Lands. 'The four raised spaces in the bore of the 
rifle between the grooves. ‘These lands grip the bullet 
as it passes through the bore and rotate it to the right 
about the longer axis. This rotation serves to prevent 
tumbling and keeps the bullet accurately on its course. 
This spinning of the bullet also causes it to drift slightly 
to the right as it passes through the air. The same 
effect is produced by throwing a baseball with a twist. 

“Twist. 'The spiral formed by the grooves in the 
barrel of the piece. ‘The twist is uniform and to the 
right, one turn in ten inches. 

“Length. The rifle without bayonet is 43.212 inches 
long. With bayonet it is 59.212 inches long. 

“Manufacture. The United States Rifle is manu- 
factured by the Government at Springfield Armory, 
Massachusetts, and Rock Island Arsenal, Illinois. 

“Rear Sight Leaf. Graduated from 100 to 2850 
yards. The odd range is on the right branch of the 
leaf, the even on the left. Note that the line corre- 
sponding to a range is below a numeral. 

“Battle sight is the position of the rear sight in which 
the leaf is laid down. ‘The slide should be drawn all 
the way back to secure full advantage of the windage. 
It corresponds to a range of 547 yards. 


TARGET PRACTICE 277 


“Rounds. The rifle will hold six cartridges. Five 
are carried in the magazine and one in the chamber. 

“Stock. Made of walnut wood. 

“Oiler and Thong Case. Furnished for every al- 
ternate rifle and is carried in butt of the stock. In one 
section is a supply of oil, in the other a thong and brush 
for cleaning the bore. In cleaning by this method draw 
the brush or rag from the muzzle toward the breech. 

“Weight. 8.69 pounds without bayonet. Bayonet 
weighs 1 pound. 


“AMMUNITION 


“Cost. About three and one-half cents per cartridge. 

“Bullet. Has a core of lead and tin composition in- 
closed in a jacket of cupro-nickel. The jacket being 
tough enables the lands in the bore to grip the bullet 
without rupturing and to rotate it while passing through 
the barrel. A lead bullet unjacketed would strip and 
pass through without rotating. It weighs 150 grains 
and is pointed to offer less resistance to the air. 

“Case. Made of brass. The government ammuni- 
tion is manufactured at Frankford Arsenal, Pennsyl- 
vania. 

“Powder. Pyrocellulose. The grains are cylindri- 
cal, single, perforated, and graphited. Normal charge 
is 47-50 grains. Pressure developed in the chamber is 
51,000 pounds per square inch. 

“Penetration. This bullet will penetrate the follow- 
ing materials to depth stated at range of 100 yards: 


278 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


Moist sand, 14.02 inches; loam, 17.46 inches; oak, 31.18 
inches; brick wall, 5.5 inches; steel plate, .4 inch. Dry 
sand is the best stop. ‘The bullet will penetrate 6.88 
inches of it at 100 yards and 13.12 inches at 500 yards. 

“Range. Maximum range, 4891.6 yards (about 2% 
miles) with the muzzle elevated 45 degrees. The time 
of flight 38.058 seconds. 

“Velocity. About 2700 feet per second at 70 de- 
OTecseL. 

“Weight. Complete cartridges weigh 395.5 grains 
depending on amount of water. It is waterproof.” 


CHAPTER V 


TENT PITCHING 


On the hike the camp will be laid out daily in advance 
by a staff officer. ‘The company being halted and in 
line, the company commander gives the order: FORM 
FOR SHELTER TENTS. | | 

The first sergeant and right guide fall in on the right 
of the company. ‘The blank files in the squads have to 
be filled by men from the file closers, and the remaining 
guides and file closers form on the left flank or at such 
places as may be designated by the company com- 
‘mander. The company commander next gives the or- 
der: 1. Take interval, 2. To the left, 3. MARCH, 
4. Company, 5. HALT. 

At the second command (to the left) the rear rank 
men march backward four steps of fifteen inches each 
and then halt. 7 

At the command MARCH, all face to the left and 
the leading man of each rank steps off. The remaining 
men step off in succession, each following the preceding 
man at four paces. ‘The rear rank men march abreast 
of their file leaders. 

The company commander gives the command HALT 
when all have gained their intervals. At this com- 


mand all halt and face to the front, dressing to the right. 
279 


280 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


The more quickly you dress and establish the line of 
tents, the more quickly you will be relieved of those 
heavy packs. This is the time to brace up and give the 
company commander your support by giving him your 
attention. If you cover in file accurately as you take 
interval you will often be accurately aligned upon halt- 
ing. 

The next command is: PITCH TENTS. At this 
command each man steps off obliquely to the right with 
the right foot (about thirty inches) and lays his rifle on 
the ground, butt to the rear and near the toe of the right 
foot, muzzle to the front, barrel to the left. He then 
steps back to his original position. During this process 
of “grounding” the rifle, the front rank man must keep 
his left foot strictly in its position. Each front rank 
man then draws his bayonet from the scabbard and 
sticks it in the ground by the outside of his right heel. 
Now in order to insure the bayonet being properly 
aligned, thus producing a straight line of tents, the 
company officers (first and second lieutenants), some- 
times are required to align the line of bayonets while the 
men are unslinging and opening their equipment. ‘The 
equipment is then unslung and laid on the ground. 
The packs are opened and the shelter half and pins 
removed therefrom. Kach man spreads his shelter 
half, small triangle to the rear, on the ground that the 
tent is to occupy, the rear-rank man’s shelter half being 
on the right. ‘Then the front- and rear-rank men but- 
ton the halves together, the rear-rank man’s half on top. 


TENT PITCHING 281 


The guy loops at each end of the lower half are then 
passed through the button holes provided in the lower 
and upper halves; next the whipped end of the guy rope 
is passed through both guy loops and secured; this is 
done at both ends of the tent, the rear-rank man work- 
ing at the rear and the front-rank man at the front. 

Each front-rank man then inserts the muzzle of his 
rifle under the front end of the tent and holds the rifle 
upright, sling to the front, heel of the butt on the ground 
beside the bayonet. ‘The rear-rank man comes to the 
front of the tent and pins down the two front corners 
on the line of bayonets, stretching the sides of the tent 
taut. He then inserts a pin in the loop of the front guy 
rope and drives it in the ground at such a distance in 
front of the rifle as to hold the rope taut. Then both 
men proceeding to the rear of the tent, each pins down a 
corner, stretching the sides and rear of the tent taut 
before driving the pin in. The rear-rank man next in- 
serts an intrenching tool or a bayonet, in its scabbard, 
under the rear end of the tent, the front rank man peg- 
ging down the end of the guy rope. The rest of the 
pins are then driven by both men, the rear-rank man 
working on the right. 

The front flaps of the tent are not fastened down, but 
thrown back on the tent. 

In pitching the tent, it is absolutely necessary that the 
front- and rear-rank men work together. Team work 
is essential. 

When the camp site is small, it is necessary that each 


fed 


282 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


Arrangement 
Field Equipm ent 
Jf. 
ohelter Tent 


gierie : 
4 pd Da Has A 


eer 
‘ 


is AGP ee 
5 = ROS v 


levation 


TENT PITCHING 283 


company pitch its tents in two lines facing each other. 

The following illustration shows the arrangement of 
the articles of the equipment when they are laid out for 
inspection. During the inspection, each man stands at 
attention in front of the corner pin of his own shelter 
half on a line with the front guy rope pin, unless ordered 


to the contrary. 


Center lire of tent 


Condiment Can 


foncho under blanket 


Bacon Can 


| €— Front ling of tent 


Belt open 


Top o Cup 
avd ci 
Canteen 
Meat Can 
Vfith 


Knife, fork 


(ind Spoon HaversacKk 


15, Entrenching too! 

left in place 
For clearness, straps,ete., are omitted. 
Suspenders remoin fastened to belf. 
All pockets, Covers,.etc., are opened. 
PLAN 


CHAPTER VI 


SIGNALS AND CODES 


1. GENERAL SERVICE CODE. (INTERNATIONAL MORSE 
CODE. ) 

Used for visual (except semaphore) and sound sig- 
naling, radio telegraphy, on cables using siphon re- 
corders, in communication with the Navy, and in intra- 
field artillery buzzer communication. 


see 


SEA aH oes Ee OoOkP 
| 
| 
NH SEs GnHnrOoWo"Z 
eee ie 


NUMERALS 


| 
| 
| 
| 
| 
| 


SIGNALS AND CODES 


PUNCTUATION 


5 8 
6 — 9 
i - 0 
Period 

Comma 

Interrogation 


Hyphen or dash 

Parentheses (before and 
after the words) 

Quotation mark (beginning 
and ending) 

Exclamation 

Apostrophe 

Semicolon - 

Colon 

Bar indicating fraction 

Underline (before and after 
the word or words it is 
wished to underline) 

Double dash (between pre- 
amble and address, be- 
tween address and body 
of message, between 
body of message and 
signature, and imme- 
diately before a frac- 
tion) 

Cross 


285 


286 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


Note.—Numerals and punctuations must be spelled 
‘out in the ardois, as they require more than four ele- 
ments, which is the limit of the ardois keyboard. 

The position is with the flag or other appliance held 
vertically, the signalman directly facing station with 
which it is desired to communicate. ‘The “dot” is to the 
right of sender, embracing an arc of 90°, starting with 
the vertical and returning to it. The “dash” is a similar 
motion to left. “Front” is downward directly in front 
and instantly returned to vertical; it indicates a pause 
or conclusion. 


— 
~~wenr” 


i‘ 
aay 
~ 


POSITION 


CONVENTIONAL FLAG SIGNALS 


For communication between the firing line and the 
reserve or commander in rear, the subjoined signals 
(Signal Corps codes) are prescribed and should be 
memorized. In transmission, their concealment from 
the enemy’s view should be insured. In the absence of 
signal flags, the head dress or other substitute may be 
used. 


SIGNALS AND CODES 287 


Letter of If signaled from the If signaled from the 


— Alphabet rear to the firing line firing line to the rear 
AM Ammunition going for- Ammunition required 
ward 
Cc Cc Charge (mandatory at all Am about to charge if no 
times ) instructions to the con- 
trary 
CF Cease firing Cease firing 
D=r Double time or “rush” Double time or “rush” or 
hurry 
I } Commence firing Commence firing 
F L Artillery fire is causing Artillery fire is causing 
us losses us losses 
G Move forward Preparing to move for- 
ward 
Ber HH Halt Halt 
K Negative Negative 
LT Left Left 
O What is the (R. N., etc.?) What is the (R. N., ete.?) 
(Ardois and Interrogatory Interrogatory 
semaphore 
only) 
>= —— — « » What is the (R. N.., etc.?)- What is the (R.N., etc.?) 
(All methods Interrogatory Interrogatory 
but ardois 
and sema- 
phore) 
P Affirmative | Affirmative 
R Acknowledgment Acknowledgment 
RN Range: Range 
Ji teed b Right Right 
SSS Support going forward Support needed 
Ay Target Target 


THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


288 


AWAYSZLNI 


a 
tL A 


a#dOd HUYOHdAdVWAS WUV-OML 


SIGNALS AND CODES 289 


ARM SIGNALS 


The following arm signals are prescribed. In mak- 
ing signals either arm may be used. Officers who re- 
ceive signals on the firing line “repeat back”’ at once to 
prevent misunderstanding. 

Forward, MARCH. Carry the 
hand to the shoulder; straighten and 
hold the arm horizontally, thrusting it 
in the direction of march. 

This signal is also used to execute 
quick time from double time. 


HALT. Carry the hand to the 
shoulder. Thrust the hand up- 
ward and hold the arm vertically. 

Double time, MARCH. Carry 
the hand to the shoulder; rapidly 
thrust the hand upward the full 


Halt: Arm held stationary extent of the arm several times. 
Double Time: Arm moved 


up and down several times 


Squads right, MARCH. 
Raise the arm laterally until 
horizontal; carry it to a verti- 
cal position above the head 
and swing it several times be- 
tween the vertical and_ hori- 
zontal positions. 


290 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


Piss 


ae y 
a Right Abou 


Squads left, MARCH. 
Raise the arm laterally until 
horizontal; carry it downward 
to the side and swing it several 
times between the downward 
and horizontal positions. 


Squads right about, 
MARCH (if in close order) 
or, To the rear, MARCH 
(if in skirmish line). Extend 
the. arm vertically above the 
head; carry it laterally down- 
ward to the side, and swing it 
several times between the ver- 
tical and downward positions. 


Change direction or 
Column right (left), 
MARCH. The hand on 
the side toward which the 
change of direction is to 
be made is carried across 
the body to the opposite 


shoulder, forearm horizontal; then swing in a horizontal 
plane, arm extended, pointing in the new direction. 


SIGNALS AND CODES 291 


As _ skirmishers, 
MARCH. Raise 
both arms laterally 
until horizontal. 


As skirmishers, 
guide center, 
MARCH. Raise 
both arms laterally 
until horizontal ; 
swing both — simul- 
; taneously upward 
As Skirmishers Guide Center until vertical, and 
return to the horizontal; repeat several times. 


Guide Right 


gd } : 
a ‘oe “wan 
Le f As Skirmishers 


As skirmishers, guide right (left), MARCH. 
Raise both arms laterally until horizontal; hold the arm 
on the side of the guide steadily in the horizontal posi- 
tion; swing the other upward until vertical, and return 
it to the horizontal; repeat several times. 


292 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


Assemble, MARCH. 
Raise the arm _ vertically 
to its full extent and de- 
scribe horizontal circles. 


Range or Change Eleva- 
> tion. To announce range, 
extend the arm toward the 
leaders or men for whom 
the signal is intended, fist 
closed; by keeping the fist 


To announce range UA closed battle sight is indi- 
Battle sight 


cated ; 


by opening and closing the fist, ex- 
Range 500 pose thumb and fingers to a number 
Orincrease by300 Equal to the hundreds of yards; 


«iL Add 50 } | 
So to add 50 yards describe a short hori- 


zontal line with forefinger. 


SIGNALS AND CODES 293 


To change elevation, indicate the 


Decrease 
by 300 


amount of increase or decrease by fin- 


gers as above; point upward to indicate 
increase and downward to indicate de- 


crease. 


What range are 


What range are you using? or What 
is the range? Extend the arms toward 
the person addressed, one hand open, 
palm to the front, resting on the other 


youusing or: hand, fist closed. 


What is the range 


wr Are you ready? or I am ready. Raise 
the hand, fingers extended and joined, 
Are you ready palm toward the person addressed. 


or: lam ready 


Commence Firings 


Commence firing. Move 
the arm extended in full 
length, hand palm down, 
several times through a 
horizontal are in front of 
the body. 

Hires taster. lixecute 
rapidly the signal “Com- 
mence firing.” 

Fire slower. Execute 
slowly the signal “Com- 
mence firing.” 


294 THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL 


Swing the cone of fire 
to the right, or left. Ex- 
tend the arm in full length 
to the front, palm to the 
right (left); swing the 
arm to right (left), and 
point in the direction of 
the new target. 

Fix bayonet. Simulate the movement of the right 
hand in “Fix bayonet.” 


To Swing cone of fine to right 


Suspend firing. Raise and hold 
the forearm steadily in a horizontal 
position in front of the forehead, 
palm of the hand to the front. 

Cease firing. Raise the forearm 
Suspend firing. as in suspend firing and swing it up 
For Cease firing - and down several times in front of 


Swing arm upand the face. 
down several times, 


pete oe mF PEO Platoon. Extend the arm hori- 
zontally toward the platoon leader; 
describe small circles with the 
hand. 


Squad. Extend the arm horizon- 
tally toward the platoon leader; 


i = <— swing the hand up and down from 
cd (elree the wrist. 
“if Squad Rush. Same as double time. 


SIGNALS AND CODES 295 


Use of signals “platoon” and “squad.” The signals 
platoon and squad are intended primarily for communi- 
cation between the captain and his platoon leaders. - 
The signal platoon or squad indicates that the platoon 
commander is to cause the signal which follows to be 
executed by platoon or squad. 


INDEX 


About face, 34 
Advance, company, 121, 122 
methods of, 126-129 
rear guard during, 223 
during attack, 148, 238 
under cover, 237 
Advance cavalry, 218 
Advance guard, 142, 213 
communication with, 220, 221 
distance from main body of, 216 
distribution of, 218 
duties of, 143, 215, 216 
strength of, 216 
supports to, 218, 219 
Age limits for reserve officers, 169, 
170 
Aiming rifle, 269 
Alignments, 66, 67 
in company movements, 88, 106, 
112 
in skirmish drill, 119 
Ammunition, 191 
data on U. S. Army, 277, 278 
Appointments to officers’ reserve 
corps, 169, 170, 175, 176 
Arm signals, 289-295 
Arms, manual of, 40-62 
Arms of the service, codperation of, 
182 
Army departments, 178 
slang, 18, 19 
Articles of War, 179 
Artillery, 183, 224 
Assembling, position of guides and 
file-closers in, 111 
Assembly of company, 88, 120, 125 
of platoons, 120, 121 
of squad, 75 
At ease, 32, 33 
march, 106 


297 


Attack, advantages of, 145, 234, 235 
deployment for, 236 
enveloping, 235, 236 
fire superiority in, 148, 207, 238 
frontal, 235 
initiative in, 145, 206 
night, 185, 186 
patrols in, 236, 244 
plan of, 147 
progress of, 147, 148, 149, 207, 
238, 239 ; 
rules for, 208, 209 
turning movement in, 235, 236 
Attention, 29 
from route step, 106 
under arms, 40 


Back step, 37 
Backward march, 37 
Barbwire, use of, 151, 186 
Base squad in extended order drills, 
112-119 
Battle-field conditions, 130, 131, 207 
Bayonet, 275 
importance of, 190 
Bed-making on practice marches, 
161 
Blanket roll, 167, 168 
Blisters, treatment for, 163 
Blue. camp, 5 
Bombs, 184, 185 


Cadet status, 15 

Camp, arrival at, 8, 6, 10 
conduct in, 11, 12, 13 
equipment in, 8, 9 

inspection of, 283 

guard duty in, 192-194 
habits in, 13, 14, 15 
mail regulations in, 6, 7 


298 


Camip—continued 
security in, 137, 138, 139 
sanitation, 164, 165 


Camping on practice marches, 161, 


279 
Camps, Federal training, 3, 4, 5 
Captain, responsibility of, 110, 133 
Cavalry, 183, 184 
advance, 218 
ammunition for, 191 
Change step, 39 
Charge during attack, 149, 239 
Close order drills, 63, 88 
Clothing, 9, 16, 17 
Coast artillery, 178 
Colors, saluting, 195 
Column, diminishing front of, 108, 109 
of platoons, change of direction 
for, 102, 103 
formation from 
squads, 105, 106 
formation from line of, 100-102 
of route, 106 
of squads, change of direction for, 
94, 103 
formation from lI’ne of, 93, 94, 
102, 103 
Combat patrols, 236, 244 
train, 191 
Commands, 28 
in company skirmish drill, 114 
to company, 86, 96-100 
Communicating trenches, 188 
Company, advance of, 121-129 
alignment in, 88, 106, 112 
assembly of, 88, 120 
dismissing the, 111, 112 
inspection arms in, 88, 89 
skirmish drills in, 114-120 
dressing, 92, 97, 99, 112 
facing, 105 
file-closers in, 108 
file formation in, 108, 109 
formation into columns, 100-102 
front into line, 99, 100, 106 
guide in, 106, 107, 108 
in line, from Une of platoons, 105, 
106 


column of 


INDEX 


Company—continued 
march at ease, 106 
to. rear, 2105 
movement on fixed pivot in, 89-93 
on moving pivot in, 93-96 
intervais in, 93 
platoons in, 110 
position of men in, 87 
roll call in, 89 
route step, 106 
squads in, 86 
Conduct, rules of, 11, 12, 13 
Codperation of different arms of 
Service, 182 
Corporals, duties on firing line of, 
134, 135 
in company movement, 96, 97, 99, 
100 
in skirmish drill, 77, 78, 115-117 
Cossack posts, 141, 227 
Counter attack, 240, 245 
Counting off, 64, 86 
Cover, advance under, 237 
detachments, duties of, 213, 214 
strength of, 215 
trenches, 188 


Day patrol, 228, 229 
Defense, advantages of, 150, 241 
fire superiority in, 244 
orders for, 243 
passive and active, 149, 239, 240 
position for, 150, 241, 242 
preparations for, 150-152, 242, 
243, 244 
use of obstacles in, 186 
Deflection, in rifle drill, 257, 259, 260 
Deployment for attack, 236 
rules for, 118-120 
Deposits for uniforms, 5, 6 
Diminishing the front of column of 
squads, 108, 109 
Discipline, value of, 16, 63 
Distances, taking, 64, 111 
Double time march, 36 
Dress, 16, 17 
Drills, close order, 63, 88 
extended order, 112 


INDEX 


Drills—continued 
rifle, 253-261 
value of, 16, 63, 180 

Duties of advance and rear guards, 

143 

of captain in battle, 133 
of corporals in battle, 134, 135 
of platoon leaders in battle, 134 
of reserve officers, 171 


Elevation, in rifle drill, 257, ie 261 

Emergency ration, 192 

Equipment, deposit for, 6 

-on practice marches, 166-168 

Estimating the situation, 146, 203, 
204 

Examination to enter Officers’ 
serve Corps, 170, 172 

Exercises, preparatory, 23-27 

Extended order drills, 112 

Eyes, front, 33 

right, 33 


Re- 


Facing, company, 105 
on skirmish line, 120 
Facings, 34 
Fall in, 33 
Fall out, 32 
Feet, care of the, 14, 162 
“Federal Reserve students,” 5 
training camps, 3, 5 
Field exercises, 127 
orders, 147, 196-199, 204-206 
ration, 192 
train, 191 
File, in squad, 63 
formation from column, 108, 109 
File-closer, sergeant as, 111 
in close order, 88 
position in column of, 102, 107 
position in company of, 92, 108 
position in company facing of, 105 
regulation of intervals by, 111 
Filipino ration, 192 
Fire attack, 127-129, 238 
control, 134 
direction, 132-134 
discipline, 135 


299 


Fire attack—continued 
superiority. in attack, 238 
in defense, 244 
trenches, 188 
Firing, conditions for effective, 131, 
132, 134, 207 
positions for, 264-267 
line, advance of, 148, 237, 238 
practice, advice on, 264-274 
Fix bayonet, from order, 58 
Flag signals, 286-288 
Flank guard, 213 
march, 38 
Following corporal, 77, 78, 115, 116, 
TIT 119 
Forward march, 35 


Gallery practice, 155, 262 
Garrison ration, 192 
Guard duty, 192-194 
Guide, distance regulation by, 92, 
rit 
duties of, 106, 107 
in column formation, 107 
in company assembly, 88, 111 
in company facing, 105 
in company pivot movements, ?1— 
94, 101 
in line or column formation, 101, 
106 
in skirmish drill, 114-116 
in squad movements, 107, 108 
of deployed line, 107 
Guides, execution of manual of arms 
Dye 11 
officers as, 106, 110, 111 


Habits, 13, 14, 15 
Half-step march, 36, 37 
Halt, 38 
during practice marches, 160 
in company movement, 97, 99 
Hand grenades, 184, 185 
salute; $1, 32 
Hardships of practice marches, 159, 
160 
Hasty cover trenches, 188 


300 


Infantry, 182 
ammunition for, 191 
Information concerning enemy, 146, 
207, 246 
Initiative, value of, 145, 206 
Inspection arms, from order, 59 
in company, 88, 89 
Inspection of camp equipment, 283 
of outpost, 231, 232 
of patrol, 248 


Instruction to officers, 5, 172, 173, 
176 

Intervals, in company movements, 
93 


in skirmish line, 78, 79 

in squad, 63, 65, 79, 80 

taking, 111 
Intrenchments, 187, 243 


Kneeling, 80, 81 
position for firing, 265 


Left shoulder arms, from port, 51- 
53 
Lieutenant, appointment from Offi- 
cers’ Reserve of, 176 
assignments of, 110 
Line formation to front, from col- 
umn, company, 99, 100 
to right, from column, company, 
96-99 
Line of observation, 140, 228 
of out guards, 140 
of platoons, from 
squads, 103 
from line, 103, 104 
of resistance, 140 
of reserves, 138, 140 
Lists of Reserve officers, 176, 177 
Loading and firing in squad, 81, 82, 
83 
Lying down, 80 


column of 


Machine guns, 184, 221, 224 
Mail, in camp, 6, 7 
Manceuver maps, 190 
Manual of arms, 40-62 
March to rear, company, 105 


INDEX 


Marches, practice, 159 
practice, see also Practice marches 
Marching rules, 160 
Marchings, 35-39 
in squad, 68-77 
Mark time, 36 
Meeting engagements, 186, 187 
Military correspondence, 180, 181, 
182 
maps, 189, 190 
problems, solving of, 199-202 
Training Camp Association, 4, 5 
in colleges, 173-176 
Mission, 146 
Mobile Army, 177, 178 
Movements in column, in company, 
102-105 
in line, in company, 96-100 
on pivot, in company, 89-96 
Musicians, position in column of, 
111 


Napoleon as military leader, 199, 
201, 206 
Nervousness in firing, 153, 157 
Night operations, 185, 186 
patrol, 228 
Noncommissioned officers, 106, 110, 
Lidecias 


Observation, line of, 140, 228 
Oblique march, 76, 77 
Obstacles, removal of, for defense, 
151 
use in defense of, 186 
Officers, grades and commands of, 
“179 
Officers’ Reserve Corps, 
Reserve officers. 
Officers’ Reserve Corps, eligibility 
for, 169-172, 175, 176 
pay in, 171, 174, 176 
purpose of, 169 
sections of, 172, 173 
Order arms, from inspection, 59 
from port, 45 
from present, 45 


see also 


INDEX 


Order arms—continued 
from right shoulder, 50 
from trail, 55 

Out guards, precautions for, 232 
line of, 140, 226, 227 
posting of, 232 

Outpost, composition of, 224 
distance from main body of, 225 
distribution of troops of, 224- 

229 

formation of, 138, 229-232 
importance of, 137, 213° 
inspection of, 231, 232 
placing of, 138, 141, 226, 231 
relieving the, 233 
strength of, 140, 223 
supports to, 138, 140, 226 
orders, 230 
reserves, 226 
sentinels, 227, 228, 229, 231 
sketches, 190 

Outposts, intercommunication — be- 

tween, 229 


Packs on practice marches, 162, 167 
Parade rest, 30 
from order, 54 
Patrol, 220, 221 
combat, 236, 244 
duties of, 229, 232, 246 
formation for, 249, 250 
instructions to, 247, 248 
meeting enemy, 250, 251 
posting of, 232 
preparation for, 248, 249 
return of, 251 
strength of, 247 
cautions, 250, 251 
commander of, 247 
Pay in Officers’ Reserve Corps, 171, 
174, 176 
Picket sentinel, 232 
Pickets, 141, 227 
posting of, 232 
Platoon columns, advance by, 122, 
124 
leaders, duties on firing line of, 
134 


301 


Platoons, assembly of, 120, 121 
commands to, 96-100 
squads in, 110 
Port arms, from left shoulder, 54 
from order, 43, 44 
from present, 45 
from right shoulder, 50 
Positions for rifle practice, 263-267 
Practice marches, camping on, 161, 
164, 165, 279 
care of feet on, 162, 163, 164 
equipment for, 166-168 
hardships of, 159, 160 
value of, 159 
water drinking on, 162 
Present arms, from order, 41, 42 
from port, 45 
from right shoulder, 51 
Prone position for firing, 266, 267 
Property for Reserve officers, 192 


Quartermaster property, 8, 9 
Quick time march, 36 


Range finders in defense, 151 
Rapid fire practice, 157, 158, 271, 
272 
target, 259 
Ration, 191, 192 


Reading list for Reserve officers, 


195, 196 
Rear, march to the, 39 
Rear guard, 142, 213 
composition -of, 221, 222 
distance from main force of, 222 
distribution of, 222 
duties of, 143, 221 
strength of, 221 
of advancing force, 223 
Reconnaissance, 220, 221, 246 
Reconnoitering patrols, duties of, 
246 
Red camp, 5 
Relations between officers and men, 
Lee 6 
Reserve officers, see also Officers’ 
Reserve Corps 


302 
Reserve officers, active service of, 
171 
appointment of, 169, 170, 172, 175, 
176 ° 


department report on, 176, 177 
instruction to, 5, 172, 173-175 
pay of, 171, 174, 176 
promotion of, 171 
property of, 192 
reading list for, 195, 196 
Training Corps, 173-175 
Reserve ration, 192 
Reserves, during advance, 142 
line of, 138, 140 
placing of, 231 
to support party, 219, 220 
Resistance, line of, 140 
Rests, 32, 33, 54 
during marches, 160, 161 
Rifle, care of, 274 
control of, 135 
data on. 1U.295. =Army, 
Q77 
drills, 253-261 
holding, 262, 263 
knowledge of, 153, 154 
nomenclature of, 253 
recoil of, 156, 157 
rules for carrying, 60, 61, 62 
salute, from order, 57 
from right shoulder, 55, 56 
from trail, 57 
sights, 154, 155, 156, 253-256 
sling of, 268 
practice, 264-274 
Right dress, 66, 67 
face, 34 
step march, 37 
turn in company movement, 97, 
99 ; 
Right shoulder arms, from order, 
46-49 
from port, 50 
from present, 51 
Rising, 81 
Road sketches, 190 
Roll call in company, 89 
Route step, company, 106 


275— 


INDEX 


Salutes, 31, 32, 56 
Saluting, 17, 18, 194, 195 
at retreat, 194, 195 
colors, 195 
Security during advance, 141 
in camp, 137, 138, 139 
on march, 213, 214, 215 
Semaphore signals, 288 
Sentinel posts, 227, 228 
Sentinels, duties of, 193, 194 
posting of, 232 
Sentry squads, 141, 227 
Sergeants in company movements, 
88, 89, Lil 
Shelter tents, 279 
Shoes, walking, 14, 15, 21, 22, 164 
Shot, calling, 270 
Side step, 37 
Sighting, 270, 271, 253-256 
Signal Corps code, 286-288 
Signals, arm, 289-295 
flag, 286-288 
general service code for, 284, 285 
semaphore, 288 
Sitting position for firing, 263, 264 
Skirmish drill, base squad in, 112- 
119 
guide in, 114-116 
in squad, 78-83 
line, advance of, 126, 127 
from column, 116-118 
from company line, 114, 115, 
116 
on oblique, 120 
to the flank, 120 
to the rear, 120 
Skirmishers in advance, 124 
Slow fire practice, 262, 263 
targets, 258 
Squad, alignment of, 66, 67 
formation of, 64 
assembly of, 75 
deploy of, 63 
dismissal of, 59, 60 
distance in, 64 
halt, 69 
number of men in, 110 
right, 68 


INDEX 


Squad—continued 
right about, 70 
right turn, 71, 72 
skirmish drill in, 78-83 
blanket roll, 168 
columns, 124 
file, 63 
intervals, 63, 65, 79, 80 
leaders in company movements, 88 
marchings, 68-77 
Squads in column movements, 102- 
105 
in company, 86 
commands to, 96-100 
Stack arms, 84 
Steps, 35-39 
Strategical maps, 190 
Supports, posting of, 231 
during advance, 142 
in attack, 149 
to advance guard, 218, 219 
to outposts, 138, 140, 226 
Surplus kit bag, 167 


Take arms, 85 

Taking intervals and distances, 111 

Target firing, 156, 157 

Team work in firing, 133 

Tent pitching, 161, 280, 281 

Tents, shelter, 279 

Term of service for Reserve officers, 
170; (171, 175 

Trail arms, from order, 55 


303 


Training camps, Federal, 3, 4, 5 
Corps for officers, 173-175 
Transportation, 191 
Travel ration, 192 
Trenches, 151, 187-189, 243 
occupation of, 243, 244 
Trigger squeeze, 269, 270 
Turn on fixed pivot from line, com- 
pany, 89-93 
on moving pivot to change direc- 
tion, company, 93-96 
Turning movement in attack, 235, 
236 
Typhoid inoculation, 7 


Unfix bayonet, from order, 58 
Uniforms, 16, 17 
deposit for, 5, 6 
U. S. Army ammunition, data on, 
QT, V8 
rifle,. data on, 275-277 
land forces, 177, 178 
military departments 3, 4, 180, 
181 


Walking, importance of, 21, 22 

Water drinking on practice marches, 
162 

War game maps, 190 

Whistle signals, 121 

White camp, 5 

Windage, 259, 261 

Withdrawal from action, 187, 245 . 


ee 


Se an 


i 


| 


4093 


2 eke nts 


-URBANA 


ll 


| 


ate abel etaly late fetat 
eal ellataty tah 


te 
% bale a 


l 


UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS 


a lt 


3 0112 06509 


batans-3-6 


. 
reer er 


tity tr, “tly vil 


a 
zi 


oietecel 

SH a Be 
‘or + 

tits elelets stetaigty! sfetebatertte wats 


rietsie: 
Sotet shetety: 
yet 
’ 
tleiely 


ee 
+ nate 


*. 


$f. 
alaletelate + 
irate telesales le feed? 
tt k “adele lalate tely Tele yet ete 
SS etatetate ai qe tyr fet 
he oe cae : Pri 
tatetelalal gre efetet Lata gig ele tats 
: : * eietett “ht 
: . ) 3 ? } 
tet! 


Mie 


gta? ! 
shalelelels 
Tetalelgtetebala, 


ae 


5 
~ 


st ett 
Arsh 
alatetely! PpPateted 
ety 


ett 
aS 34? 


x seseses 
sad Sh <0 Sane D8 ae ms 4 ee 


olsiety tetera’ 
tatetst, eis 


Tate TRIO 


Sits 
ahelete tal 


saeit + 4 
Heh 
ses - 
Patatel 


ait ; ‘ deisine RHE 3 

oh 3% i sfatet sf SBeaiy : 

3 Q | : cuneaeetal: 
M ratte + inh pene saya) ttitirety 32 t sieiytat 

r ete rtoscets Tet) a trTeta’s : 

rahe asf nt? ribs ainteletatytehatal stats a 


. pie With ee nh a a sennaara 
J 


fetyt shotetets tet 
oe nt 
a see th 
fceaett : 3, raitieitis nretterte : atetst rerdsates 
mn) oe - gpa oS ; petiattaaeaia 
ies stots at : St 
ts ai iet 
etetet mite ate ! 
tte i prtst feted ale 


stots? 
setae ie 
Bahan hey Hate Te? THe 


pa The tatlte tlt 


thet 


ats i : / . nett 7 B45 
< : 
sistefelece Ba 


e sitet tate 33 
Patt tetatet tate : 


